Lift control system X2

HHT

X7 X41

SAFETY CCT CLOSED

>A<
01
[Link]

MANUAL

9
FUNC Select

8
1
F

X4

7
2
Drive S

6
1
E

X26
2

5
3
Enter

4
4

3
5
6

2
OUT
7 Shift

1
IN
8

4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

F1 F2

X25
S998

3
S25

2
1
X1

S140

S205
B
S141

S206
BR
1 EVAC 0 TEST R1/R2

2
X24
X1 X40 J90 X9 S143/S207
S1000

1
J1
FST
1
SAFETY CCT CLOSED AUX
X18

STATUS
0 2
3
>A< '''@'''
01 [Link] ERROR
K37
K38

X43
1 1
4

X41

USB-Host
CAN

NH
LT
ZU

B
C
A
SP
1

USB-Slave
TK
TK

J2
TK

NH
SK

FK

J110 X11
X42 X5 X6 X3

1 X23 2 3 4 5 6 X27 2 3 4 X28 2 3

Func
2 X13 14

J131
JS J133 K23
Drive Select J135
+ J120 X12 J136
X16
3

K22
Enter
5 4

1 2 3 4
X2
X30

K21
X3
Shift
7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
X17
J131
J133
J135
J136

X4
K20
13 12 11 10 9

X5 X13
B A A B C
NH
X19

ZU SP SP TK TK TK NH 1 2 3 4
SK FK
X6

1 3 4 6 7 8 X15 2 3 5 6 7
X14

X14 X15 K20

K21
X30 D22 X32
X16 K14
X32

K22

X17 X18 X19

K23
K10
K11
K12
K7
K8
K9

K1
K2
K3
K4
K0
K5
K6

X.

K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13

K13
24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC
230 V AC

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
X21

X20

X20 X21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12



Manufacturer NEW LIFT Steuerungsbau GmbH

Lochhamer Schlag 8
82166 Gräfelfing

Tel +49  89  –  898  66  –  0

Fax +49  89  –  898  66  –  300
Mail info@[Link]

[Link]

Service line Tel +49  89  –  898  66  –  110

Mail service@[Link]

First edition 09.07.2015

Author KH/TB/AL

Last change 06.12.2017 / DOS

Release 29.11.2017 AL

Hardware version FST-2XT 3.4 FST-2XTs 3.0

Software version V2.000.0138

Doc. no. hb_fst2XT_XTs_2017-11_en

Copyright © NEW LIFT Steuerungsbau GmbH, 2017.

This manual is protected by copyright. All rights, including those of copying, of

reproduction, of translation and of modification, in whole or in part, are reserved by
the publisher.

No part of this description may be reproduced in any form or copied with an

electronic replication system without written permission.

Although great care has been taken in the production of texts and figures, we
cannot be held legally liable for possible mistakes and their consequences.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 


Content
1 About this manual 6
1.1 General 6
1.2 Abbreviations, characters and symbols used 6
1.3 Further information 7
1.4 How to contact us 7

2 General safety regulations 8

2.1 Qualifications of the installing engineer 8
2.2 Residual dangers 8
2.3 Safety regulations 9

3 FST-2XT/s controller user interface 11

3.1 Keypad functions 13
3.1.1 When switching on 13
3.1.2 Main screen 13
3.1.3 Main menu and test menu 15
3.1.4 Error list 15
3.1.5 Information page 16
3.1.6 Frequency inverter with DCP interface 16
3.1.7 Guide 16
3.1.8 Front panel / operating and display elements 19
3.1.9 Emergency mode monitor (NBM) 22
3.1.10 Evacuation - function principle  23
3.1.11 Brake test - function principle  23
3.1.12 Shaft door RESET - function principle 24
3.2 LCD-Display and messages 24
3.2.1 Main screen 24
3.2.2 Line A – Safety circuit messages 24
3.2.3 Line B – State messages 25
3.2.4 Line C – Status messages 27
3.2.5 Line C - Diagnostic messages 27
3.2.6 Line D - Drive mode messages 36
3.3 Information texts 37
3.3.1 Information page 40
3.4 LEDs 41

4 Technical data 42
4.1 Component overview – bus plan 42
4.2 FST controller 43
4.2.1 Technical details and data 43
4.2.2 FST jumpers 48
4.2.3 LEDs 50
4.2.4 Safety circuit bypass control 51
4.2.5 Terminal strips and sockets 52
4.3 Car top control module FSM-2 59
4.3.1 Technical data  59
4.3.2 Jumpers 60

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 3




4.3.3 LEDs 61
4.3.4 Terminal strips and sockets 62
 66
4.4 LON bus 68
4.4.1 Technical data 68
4.5 Flat travelling cable 69
4.5.1 Technical data 69

5 Menu tree 71
5.1 General 71
5.2 MAIN MENU - Lock Menu 83
5.3 MAIN MENU - Service 84
5.4 MAIN MENU - Drive 86
5.4.1 Drive optimisation 89
5.5 MAIN MENU - Config 90
5.5.1 Park drive programs 107
5.5.2 Show LON modules 108
5.5.3 ADM bus masks 109
5.5.4 Car ventilation 109
5.5.5 Display 0 ... 2 109
5.5.6 Pin 34 function 110
5.5.7 Loading function 110
5.5.8 Lobby Stop 112
5.5.9 [Link]-Security 112
5.5.10 VIP mode 113
5.6 MAIN MENU - Positioning 114
5.6.1 Positioning parameters  118
5.6.2 Relevelling limits 120
5.7 MAIN MENU - Calls 121
5.7.1 Special call mode 121
5.7.2 Attendant operation 122
5.8 MAIN MENU - System 123
5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller 127
5.8.2 Copy from / to USB  127
5.8.3 Update via USB 128
5.9 MAIN MENU - Doors 128
5.9.1 Door-Lock Types 131
5.9.2 Door times diagram 132
5.10 TEST MENU 133

6 Programmable I/O ports 135

6.1 General 135
6.2 Bit calculation 136
6.3 Programmable I/O ports 137
6.4 I/O functions 138
6.4.1 Function “landing call” 139
6.4.2 Function “fire signal” 140
6.4.3 Function “landing priority” 140

4 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 


6.4.4 Function “position indicator” 141

6.4.5 Function “door open button” 142
6.4.6 Function “door close button” 142
6.4.7 Function “flag” 142
6.4.8 Function “signal” 146
6.4.9 Function “evacuation” 148
6.4.10 Function “special drive” 148
6.4.11 Function “emergency call misuse” 149
6.4.12 Function “speed threshold” 150
6.4.13 Function “DRM I/O Port” 150
6.4.14 Function “destination call” 151
6.4.15 Function “ramp drive” 151
6.4.16 Function “bypass floor locking” 151
6.4.17 Function “block floors” 152

7 LON module configuration 153

8 Error list 159
8.1 Error messages 159
8.2 Event messages 167

9 Index 169
10 Certificates 174

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 5

About this manual
General

1 About this manual

1.1 General
The FST-2XT/s manual is a comprehensive reference work for experienced lift service experts.
Objectives of this manual:
››describe the features of the LON bus technology
››describe the technical data of the FST and its sub-assemblies
››describe the operation of the FST
››describe the configuration of the FST
››describe the FST menu and its settings
››describe the messages of the FST

Note! The product designation FST always refers to both products unless explicitly denoted with FST-
2XT and FST-2XTs.

1.2 Abbreviations, characters and symbols used

ADM
Landing call module
CMM
Critical Module Monitoring
FPM
car operating panel module; is needed for controlling car operating panels and is available in two versions:
FPM-1 and FPM-2.
FSM
car top control module; is always required in combination with an FST controller. The two versions of the FSM
are the FSM-1 (FST-1 controller) and FSM-2 (FST-2 controller).
GND
ground; conductive body that is defined with potential 0 V. Serves as reference potential for all signal and opera-
ting voltages.
HSG
emergency power supply unit
TC
Correction, top
BC
Correction, bottom
L
live wire, external conductor; all electrically conductive parts that are under voltage during normal operation and
are not neutral wires. With three-phase alternating current, the external conductors are designated with L1, L2,
L3.
DRM
Runtime monitoring
PE
Protective earth; earth wire

The characters and symbols used in this manual have the following meaning:
System stop
Marks settings requiring a system stop in case a change becomes necessary. The FST controller displays the
text Lift must be stopped to change the value. OK? If you wish to change the value, confirm with
YES, if you do not wish to change the value or wish to change it later, then confirm with NO.

6 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 About this manual
Further information

 Delivery condition
Settings that are supplied as standard are marked with an asterisk .
Symbol + Key combination:
Press the linked keys simultaneously.

General warning notice

This sign marks important notices that you should absolutely observe.

Electrostatic charging
››Keep the electronic assembly in its original packaging until installation.
››Before opening the original packaging, a static discharge must be performed. To do this, touch a grounded
piece of metal.
››During work on electronic assemblies, periodically perform this discharge procedure.

Danger of falling

This sign marks activities with danger of falling.

Information notice
Important notes are marked with this symbol.

1.3 Further information

The following documents, among others, are available for the FST-2XT/XTs controller and its components:
››ADM manual
››EAZ TFT.45.110.210 manual
››EAZ-256 manual
››EN81-20 manual
››FPM manual
››FST-2XT/s manual
››Update-Backup-Analysis manual
››FST-2XT MRL manual
››GST-XT manual
››LCS manual
››RIO manaul
››SAM manual
››UCM-A3 manual
These and other current manuals can be found in the download area of our website under Service at
[Link]

1.4 How to contact us

If, after referring to this manual, you still require assistance, our service line is there for you:
Tel +49 89 – 898 66 – 110
Mail service@[Link]
Mon. - Thurs.: 8:00 a.m.  –  12:00 p.m. and 1:00 p.m.  –  5:00 p.m.
Fr: 8:00  a.m. –  3:00 p.m.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 7

General safety regulations
Qualifications of the installing engineer

2 General safety regulations

All important safety regulations are summarised in this chapter. These safety instructions must always be adhe-
red to during all work on the installation.
All persons performing installation and commissioning work on the FST controller must read this chapter and
follow its regulations.
Laws, regulations, guidelines and standards that apply in the country of operation must be followed in addition
to the safety regulations mentioned in this manual.

2.1 Qualifications of the installing engineer

The installing engineer must:
››be over 18 years of age (exception: apprentices who are over 16 years of age and are permanently supervised
by an engineer qualified for training apprentices).
››have first aid training,
››have theoretical and practical knowledge of regulations and measures for the prevention of fire and explosions
in his work area,
››be able to identify, avoid and rectify all dangers that might occur during his work in the shaft and in the operating
rooms,
››be able to identify and rectify all irregularities and faults that might occur during installation and operation of a lift
system,
››have theoretical and practical knowledge of operating principles and requirements of electric controls and drive
systems.
All installation and commissioning work on electric and electronic components of the FST controller must be
performed by or supervised by a qualified electrician.
A qualified electrician has appropriate training and knowledge of regulations that allow him to judge the quality
of the work performed and identify possible dangers (DGUV instruction 3).

2.2 Residual dangers

Danger for persons
The following shall always apply during all work on the installation:

Danger to life! Do not touch live parts while working on electrical equipment.
››Before starting work, make sure the system is off circuit.
››Only carry out any installation work on electrical components when these are switched off and in an unpowered
state.
››Only use insulated tools when working on electrical system components.

Risk of injury when lifting or moving the control cabinet if it falls down or tips over.
››Only transport and lift the control cabinet with suitable equipment (lift truck, hoisting gear etc.).
››All workers must be trained in using these aids and must observe all applicable special regulations to avoid
accidents.

Falling parts or parts protruding into the shaft. Risk of serious injury or death.
››Block the shaft access points.
››Before beginning installation work, remove all foreign parts and assembly aids that are not required from the
shaft.

Electrical hazard, leaking gas or water due to pierced supply lines. Risk of serious injury or death.
››Make sure no supply lines are in the installation location before starting any installation work.

8 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 General safety regulations
Safety regulations

Danger of falling! Installing engineers and unauthorised persons can fall down the shaft. Risk of serious injury or
death.
››Block the shaft access points.
››Use suitable protection (e.g. safety harnesses, scaffoldings) when working on or in the shaft.

Danger of crushing due to intentional or accidental car movement. Risk of serious injury or death.
››Block the shaft access points.
››Before starting any work, make sure that there are no persons in the shaft or in the vicinity of moving parts of
the drive.
››Prevent unauthorised operation of the controller.

Risk of material damage

The following shall always apply during all work on the installation:

Electrostatic charging
››Keep the electronic assembly in its original packaging until installation.
››Before opening the original packaging, a static discharge must be performed. To do this, touch a grounded
piece of metal.
››During work on electronic assemblies, periodically perform this discharge procedure.

Electronic assemblies are destroyed by defective, interchanged or incorrectly mounted connectors, short-circui-
ting or excess voltage.
››Check plugs for mechanical damage.
››Never change pre-assembled connectors or cables.
››Only connect loose or torn off wires according to circuit diagram details if this is possible on site (suitable mate-
rial and tools must be available).
››Pay attention to coding pins and latch lugs.

2.3 Safety regulations

General
››The instructions of the lift manufacturer and the instructions in this manual must be followed during installation
and commissioning of the lift system.
››The shaft must be secured against unauthorised trespassing during installation and commissioning.
››Assemblies, devices and cables must be installed and fastened securely and permanently.
››Loads must be moved with suitable aids (lift trucks, hoisting gear etc.).
››Sharp and pointed tools or other potentially dangerous objects may only be carried along in clothing if suitable
protective measures have been taken to rule out any danger.
››Alcohol and drugs must not be consumed before and during installation and commissioning.

Documentation
››A copy of the installation and commissioning manual must be available to the installing engineer at the time of
installing and commissioning the FST controller and its components.
››A copy of the installation and commissioning manual and the wiring diagrams must be kept in the control cabi-
net at all times after installation.
››The wiring diagrams supplied with the FST controller are binding. Changes must only be made after consulting
NEW LIFT and must be documented in writing on the system.
››The factory test logs of the FST controller remain with NEW LIFT.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 9

General safety regulations
Safety regulations

Electricity
››Regulations for installing and operating electrical equipment (VDE 0100) and regulations of local utilities must
be followed.
››The specified distances between different electrical assemblies must be controlled and maintained.
››All installation work must be carried out with the system shut down and off circuit.
››All cables and wires must be installed with sufficient strain relief.
››The neutral and ground wires must be routed separately.
››The control cabinet must be supplied with a clockwise rotary field.

Working in the shaft

››Any work in the shaft requires perfect and permanent communication between the supervisor on the FST cont-
roller in the motor room and the workers in the shaft.
››Components in the shaft must be arranged or secured in such a way that persons accessing the shaft for ins-
pection, maintenance or repair purposes are not in danger.
››The maximum load of the lift system must not be exceeded.
››The specified overruns of the emergency end switches in relation to the speed must be observed.
››The emergency installations must not be activated during normal operation.
››All emergency installations and braking systems must be checked for trouble-free operation and all shaft entran-
ces closed off before beginning work.
››Installation and operation are prohibited if other persons could be in danger.
››Workers must be secured against falling.
››In case of any work interruptions, the car must be moved to the lowest stop position, the control system swit-
ched off and the power supply (e.g. UPS) permanently disconnected.

Personal safety equipment of the installing engineer

››Eye protection
››Safety boots
››Protective helmet
››Safety harness
››Clothing suitable to the ambient conditions of the installation location
››Jewellery, watches and similar items may not be worn; a hair net must be used if applicable.

Handling electronic assemblies

››Leave electronic assemblies in their original packaging until installation.
››Touch a grounded piece of metal prior to opening the original packaging to prevent damage from static charges.
››All bus inputs and outputs not in use must be equipped with a terminal resistor (terminator). Exception: FSM-2
X23 and FST X2 are only for use with the HHT hand-held terminal and must not be terminated with a terminator.

Waste disposal
››All packaging material must be disposed of in an environmentally acceptable manner; paper, plastic, metal,
electronic assemblies etc. must be recycled.

10 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Safety regulations

3 FST-2XT/s controller user interface

The user interface of the FST controller is located on the FST main circuit board in the control cabinet of the lift
system. The FST user interface consists of front panel, LCD-Display, keypad and LEDs.

FST
GESCHLOSSEN
STATUS
>A< '''@'''
01 [Link] ERROR

USB-Host

USB-Slave

Func

Drive Select

Enter

Shift

B A A B C
ZU SP SP TK TK TK NH NH
SK FK

Fig. 3.1: FST-2XT controller user interface

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 11

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Safety regulations

Fig. 3.2: FST-2XTs controller user interface

12 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

3.1 Keypad functions

The FST controller is operated using seven buttons. The button have different functions in the different displays.

3.1.1 When switching on

SAFETY CCT CLOSED

>AX< >BX< '''@'''

00 [Link]

 Pressing and holding the  button during the switch-on sequence of the FST starts emergency
operation. In emergency operation, no drives are possible. Emergency operation is required if the
FST cannot be switched on in normal mode due to a malfunction. The complete FST menu and the
USB interface are active in emergency operation!

3.1.2 Main screen

SAFETY CCT CLOSED

<A> '''@'''
00 [Link]

Set car call to top floor

�
Set car call to bottom floor
�
Switch landing control on and off (switch function)
�
Open test menu
�
Open main menu

Activating emergency operation: before switching on, press and hold down until the FST
 has completely started up (FST manual)
Set car call to next floor up
+�
Set car call to next floor down
+�
Scroll through the right status messages in line C
+�
Scroll through the left status messages in line C
+�
Display information page
+
Switch diagnostic message in line C on or off
+�+�
Perform controller RESET
�+�+�+�
Switch over to converter menu (DCP)
�

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 13

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

Guide functions menu button

�
Selection / Enter button for confirming the function in the Guide menu
�
Menu navigation: scroll UP
�
Menu navigation: scroll DOWN
�
Function button F1 (S25)*
F1

F2
Function button F2, currently without function (S998)*

Button for manual activation of brake A (S140)*

A

Button for manual activation of brake B (S141)*

B

Key switch with three positions; BT = brake test (S143); contact connected in series
upstream of R1/R2 for resetting shaft head or shaft pit (S207)*
EAC switch (S1000) for switching evacuation ON/OFF; the toggle flashes* in the ON
setting
Button for resetting an access monitor of the shaft head*

Button for resetting an access monitor of the shaft pit*

Auxiliary control switch ON/OFF/DOWN/UP S21/22/23*

0
1 1

Notice: * only with FST-2XTs

14 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

3.1.3 Main menu and test menu

MAIN MENU
Drive
Config
>Positioning

Move cursor up
�
Move cursor down
�
Exit submenu
�
Change menu level
�
Select submenu / menu item

s+£ Sets all places of a value to "_"

Clock Setting

[Link]

Increase value
�
Decrease value
�
Move cursor left
�
Move cursor right
�
Confirm setting


3.1.4 Error list

ERROR[00037/00040]
28.09 [Link] [012]
Door close failed
FLOOR:03 V00 R01 I00

Switch to 2nd to 8th information byte in line D

�
Switch to initial display in line D
�
To previous error message
+�
To next error message
+�

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 15

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

3.1.5 Information page

-- FST Information ---

HW Ver. :FST-2XT
SW Ver. :V 2.000-0107
: 26/11/2014

Scroll one line up

�
Scroll one line down
�
Back to main screen


3.1.6 Frequency inverter with DCP interface

Frequency inverters with DCP interface can be operated and configured from the FST menu (FST
� X11 connected). The menu of the frequency inverter is simulated on the FST display by pressing the
� button once. The FST buttons then perform the function of the frequency inverter buttons. The
FST display is restored by pressing the � buttons again.

3.1.7 Guide

General
The guide is an extension of the FST-2XT/s. In no way does it intervene in operations performed by the control-
ler and is operated with a different group of buttons. The four blue buttons, which are responsible for the guide,
are located on the right side of the front panel of the FST-2XT.

Fig. 3.3: Guide FST-2XT (marked red)

16 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

Fig. 3.4 Guide FST-2XT (marked red)

Display
The display is divided into two sections and consists of the following parts:
››FST-2XT/s screen
The top part of the display is the FST-2XT/s screen with the same functions, menus and navigation found in
the previous versions of the FST controllers. These four lines are the familiar display of the FST controllers
and consist of four lines of 20 characters each. They are operated with the four white arrow buttons and three
grey function buttons located underneath. Nothing has changed in the presentation and the keypad functions;
everything functions as previously. After switching on and during normal operation, the FST-2XT/s controller
displays the main screen.
››Guide
The lower part of the display shows the guide, which provides information about the individual menu items of
the FST-2XT/s menu and which has additional functions that are described in the following.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 17

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

Buttons

The �, �, �and � buttons are NOT needed for changing the FST-2XT/s parameters in the menu. They
are used only for the navigation of the guide.

Use the � / � buttons to move the cursor in the text field. The text sections with a coloured background can
be selected with the � button if the cursor is located on top of them. If no text section with a coloured back-
ground is selected, the � button can be used to move to the previous text section.

Use the � button to open the Function menu. Press the button again to exit the menu.

The ten functions of the guide can be selected with the � button.
› Active Call List
› Help
› Event Recorder
› Emergency Status
› Door Status
› I/O Ports
› Safety Circuit
› Positioning
› Weight Sensor
› Drive Curve
Choose the desired function by using the arrow buttons to move the colour highlighting over the terms and
confirm the selection with the � button.
Return to the standard Help menu with the � button, use the arrow buttons to move the cursor onto the Help
menu item and select with the � button or, if a different parameter or menu item is called up on the FST-2XT/s,
the guide automatically switches to the Help function.

Functions

Active Call List

Specifies the position of the car as well as all car calls and landing calls.
The displayed table contains the following three columns:
››In the left column, the existing floors are displayed from bottom to top with their floor name.
››The middle column, IDR (car), shows the received and not-yet-processed car calls; these are marked with an
“x” depending on door side. If no car call is pending, this is indicated with a “-”.
››The right column, ADR (landing), shows the received and not-yet-processed landing calls; these are marked
with a “U” (up direction), with a “D” (down direction) or with a “B” (both directions) depending on door side and
direction. If no landing call is pending, this is indicated with a “-”.
The current destination is indicated with a “T” next to the corresponding floor name. The position of the car is
indicated by a black rectangle next to the floor name.

Help
General help for operating the FST-2XT/s.

Event Recorder
Displays a filtered event list on the controller

Emergency Status
Emergency mode monitor, (see „3.1.9 Emergency mode monitor (NBM)“ page 22)

18 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

Door Status
Graphic display of the car doors, photocell and their functions

I/O Port
Graphic display of the port´s signal level with the specific adjustment, locality and function.

Safety Circuit
Graphic display and history of the safety circuit inputs of the FST

Positioning
Graphic display of the positioning and their diagnostics possibilities.

Weight Sensor
Tabular display / graphic display of the load threshold and load capacity (LCS)

Drive Curve
Graphic display of the speeds shown in diagram form

3.1.8 Front panel / operating and display elements

General
Like the previous version, the FST-2s, the FST-2XTs microprocessor controller forms a unit between the user
interface for lift technicians and for the lift attendant.
The FST-2XTs front panel is divided into two different coloured areas to indicate the user interfaces.
››Blue: lift technicians (light grey)
››Yellow: lift attendant for the freeing of persons (dark grey)
Faulty operation of the blue user interface by the lift attendant is safeguarded against by a removable key,
button locks and signage. The lift company is responsible for the safe storage of the key to protect against faulty
operation! NEW LIFT recommends that the key be stored in the lower area of the control cabinet, which is inac-
cessible to the lift attendant, or the door frame.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 19

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

X2
HHT

X7 X41

SAFETY CCT CLOSED

>A<
01
[Link]

FUNC Select

Drive S

Enter

OUT
Shift IN

F1 F2
S998
S25
S140

A
S205

B
S141

S206

BR
1 EVAC 0 TEST R1/R2
S143/S207
S1000

AUX
0
1 1
NH
LT
ZU

B
C
A
SP
1

TK
TK
TK

NH
SK

FK

X5 X6 X3

Fig. 3.5: Front panel of the FST-2XTs

Function button F1
This freely usable function button is preferably used to manually control anti-creep coils, which are located on
the speed limiter. The connection of the positively driven operating contacts, controlled by function button F1
(S25), is located on clamping connectors X25:1 and 2 (NO) and on clamping connectors X24:1 and 2 (NC).
The pitch and the conductor paths of the clamping connector are suitable for integration in the safety circuit. For
acknowledgement upon button actuation, a yellow LED next to the button illuminates.

20 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

Function button F2
This function button currently has no function.

Brake release button A

Brake release button A (S140) is used to directly control brake A via relay K32-A. This control is only effective if
the “EVAC” evacuation switch (S1000) or the “BR TEST” brake test key switch S143 is actuated. In addition, the
external circuits, which are what enable direct control if, e.g., the main switch is switched off in “EVAC” opera-
tion, are necessary. Refer to the system circuit diagram for these external circuits. Upon actuation of the button
and with “EVAC” or “BR TEST” switched on, the positively driven contacts of the K32-A interrupt the safety
circuit. In addition, the rest position of the relay is queried by the standstill monitor of the FST-2XTs. Thus, upon
actuation of the button or in the event of a malfunction, the “EMERGENCY STOP” message is output and, after
approx. 2 seconds, the “DRM CONTACTOR MONIT.” message. For acknowledgement upon button actuation, a
yellow LED next to the button illuminates.

Brake release button B

The function of brake release button B (S141) is analogous to S140.

Reset 1
Button “Reset 1” (S205) is used to reset external peripherals to safeguard protected areas in the shaft head.
In addition, the key switch (S207) is to be actuated. The potential-free contact of relay K35-A is connected to
terminals 3 and 4 of terminal strip X27. For acknowledgement upon button actuation, a yellow LED next to the
button illuminates.

Reset 2
Button “Reset 2” (S206) is used to reset external peripherals to safeguard protected areas in the shaft pit. In
addition, the key switch (S207) is to be actuated. The potential-free contact of relay K29-A is connected to termi-
nals 1 and 2 of terminal strip X27. For acknowledgement upon button actuation, a yellow LED next to the button
illuminates.

EVAC
Switch “EVAC” S1000 is used to evacuate persons trapped in the car (freeing of persons). Upon actuation,
visual and audible signals are emitted, thereby indicating to the user that an abnormal condition is active. Accor-
ding to the external NEW LIFT standard circuit (see system circuit diagram), relay K31-A initiates interruption
of the safety circuit and activation of an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) to supply emergency power to the
controller. For this reason, power for the switch and for the relay must be supplied via a 24VDC auxiliary power
source.

BR Test
The “BR Test” key switch (S143) is used primarily to test the dual circuit system of the brake. Upon actuation of
the button, relay K34-A activates the positively driven contacts and enables a bypass to the evacuation switch.
Relay K34-A is monitored by the FST-2XTs via the standstill monitor. If actuated for a longer period of time, i.e.,
approx. 2 seconds, the “DRM CONTACTOR MONIT.” message is output.

Enable R1 / R2
Key switch “R1/R2” (S207) is connected in series upstream of buttons S205 and S206. Unintended actuation of
the Reset button is thereby prevented.

AUX - auxiliary mode control

The standard auxiliary mode control function (S21/S22) is used to move the car with the appropriate bridging
function in the safety circuit.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 21

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

3.1.9 Emergency mode monitor (NBM)

Fig. 3.6 Fig. 3.7

Fig. 3.8

Emergency mode monitor (NBM)

The emergency mode monitor contains all information needed for the freeing of persons, should it be neces-
sary. These include the physical direction, position, door zone and speed of the car.

22 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Keypad functions

This yellow arrow indicates the physical direction of the car in the up direction;
the flashing frequency of the arrow is dependent on the speed, slow flashing =
slow speed and fast flashing or permanently on = fast speed
This yellow arrow indicates the physical direction of the car in the down direc-
tion, the flashing frequency of the arrow is dependent on the speed, slow
flashing = slow speed and fast flashing or permanently on = fast speed
If the lift is in the door release area (door zone), this field illuminates green
with black text "ZONE"

Displays the current car position with respect to the floor name. Attention!
The car is only located in the door release area if the green "Zone" field
illuminates!
Displays the current speed of the car. At V greater than 0.2m/s, the colour
changes from yellow to red.
Illustrates the distance between two floors. This display is intended to illustrate
the direction to the next closest floor in the event of evacuation with auxiliary
mode control.

3.1.10 Evacuation - function principle

Manual evacuation
If evacuation by means of auxiliary mode control is not possible due to a power failure or a technical defect,
manual evacuation, i.e., energising the brake coils, can be performed. Prerequisite for this function is a UPS
(uninterruptible power supply) that provides the controller as well as the holding brake with sufficient power. This
is always performed by switching off the main or remote switch and switching on the EVAC switch. In position
“1”, a beeper and an integrated LED on the switch toggle signal at a cycle rate of 0.5 sec that EVAC operation
is activated. In this state, the brake circuits can be directly controlled via buttons S140 and S141. Each of the
buttons controls one relay; these are located on the FST. The positively driven NC contacts of the relays are
located in the safety circuit; following a confirmation, the “EMERGENCY STOP” message is then output in
the FST display. An intermittent relay, which is located on the FST, interrupts the power supply of the relay at
V>0.2m/s. When the next floor (unlocking zone) is reached, the controller stops the car itself by means of the
“levelled stop assistant”. Actuate the S140/141 button again to activate the brakes again. The intermittent brake
as well as the levelled stop assistant are comfort functions; the lift attendant remains responsible for performing
the evacuation procedure according to the evacuation instructions that are provided with every controller.

3.1.11 Brake test - function principle

Dual circuit test

For the function test of a two-circuit brake, selective control is necessary. This is performed with brake release
button S140/141. Enabling of the brake release button is performed by actuating key switch S143. This bypas-
ses the evacuation circuit and goes directly to manual activation of the brakes. The key switch is monitored by
the FST standstill monitor. If the key switch is actuated for longer than 2 sec, the “DRM CONTACTOR MONIT”
message is output on the FST display. Thus, the switch is not to be actuated until during the drive; the S140 or
S141 button is then to be actuated in order to force one of the two brake circuits to remain open. Refer to the
system circuit diagram for detailed instructions. Upon completion of the test, the key is to be stored safely to
protect against access by unauthorised persons.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 23

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

3.1.12 Shaft door RESET - function principle

RESET 1 / 2
To reset any present external safety devices used for monitoring protected areas or access of those areas or
that are used for other measures in the shaft pit and/or shaft head, two buttons as well as one key switch are
provided on the front panel of the FST-2XTs. Connected in series upstream of buttons “RESET 1” (S205) and
“RESET 2” (S206) is key switch “R1/R2” (S207). Resetting is thus only possible by actuating both the respective
RESET button and the key switch. Upon actuation of the key switch, a signal sounds in 0.1 second intervals.
Once resetting has been completed, the key is to be stored safely to protect against from access by unautho-
rised persons.

3.2 LCD-Display and messages

The LCD-Display consists of four lines (A, B, C and D) with 20 columns each. After switching on and during
normal operation, the FST controller displays the main screen.

3.2.1 Main screen

SAFETY CCT CLOSED

>AX< '''@'''
00 [Link]

A Maximum active state of the safety circuit

B Active state or error
C Status of the lift system / diagnostic message
D Data for current drive mode

Line C has a special status. In the normal state (after switching on), it displays status messages (see „3.2.4 Line
C – Status messages“ page 27). Switch with the +�+� button combination to display diagnostic messa-
ges (see „3.2.5 Line C - Diagnostic messages“ page 27).
For further information, (see „3.1 Keypad functions“ page 13).

3.2.2 Line A – Safety circuit messages

Display Description
SAFETY CCT CLOSED The safety circuit is completely closed (FST X14.1, FST X14.2).
SAFTY-CLOSED The input "Safety circuit closed" has no power. Possible causes:
MISSING ››Terminal FST X14.1 has no power (normally bridged with X14.2)
››Relay K14 (230V) on the FST is faulty
DOOR LOCK-A OPEN The shaft door contact of door side A is interrupted (FST X14.3).
DOOR LOCK-B OPEN The shaft door contact of door side B is interrupted (FST X14.2).*
DOOR A OPEN The car door contact of side A is interrupted (FST X14.4).
DOOR B OPEN The car door contact of side B is interrupted (FST X14.5).
DOOR C OPEN The car door contact of side C is interrupted (FST X14.6).
MANUAL DOOR OPEN A manual door contact is interrupted (FST X14.6).
EMERGENCY STOP An emergency switch in the shaft is interrupted (terminal FST X14.7).
EMERGENCY STOP CAR An emergency switch on the car is interrupted (FST X32.4).

The messages DOOR C OPEN, MANUAL DOOR OPEN and EMERGENCY END SWITCH are triggered by the
same safety circuit input of the FST (TC input: FSTX14.6) and exclude each other.
Note! : * not with FST-2XTs.

24 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

3.2.3 Line B – State messages

Display Description
LOW 24 V! The 24V power supply of the FST board (FST X1.1, X1.2) is below the permitted
range of 17 V. Check power supply and cables in the supply line.
POST-EMERGENCY STOP Landing control is blocked by a safety circuit interruption (interruption before
terminal FST X32.4), line A displays EMERGENCY STOP.
LANDING CALLS OFF The landing control has been switched off manually. Possible causes of
switch-off:

›› � Button of the FST keypad

››Programmable input of an external RIO module
››Input FST X1.14
››Programmable input on the FST controller
››Key switch on car operating panel (FPM-1 X4.37 / FPM-2 X1.13)
››Key switch on landing call panel (ADM input X3.12 / X3.13)
FIREMAN MODE A fire input is active. Possible causes of fire recall:
››Fire input on landing call module (ADM input X3.12 / X3.13)
››Programmable input on the FST controller
››GST Group Controller (see GST manual)
END-SWITCH TEST The manual end switch test is performed (see „5.10 TEST MENU“ page 135).
ES-SPEED MON. TEST The manual test of the deceleration monitoring function at the top and bottom
end floors is running (see „5.10 TEST MENU“ page 135).
EVACUATION The controller is in evacuation mode. The reason for the evacuation signal may
be:
››A programmable input on the FST controller
››A programmable input on the GST Group Controller
››LMS via protocol adapter module
SEND FAX The controller is in fax mode (see Installation & Commissioning – Fax modem).
LIFT OFF The controller has been switched off. Possible causes of switch-off:
››Car lighting failure
››Input "Car Lighting OFF", FST X1.13
››Programmable I/O port of a RIO module (external)
››Programmable I/O port of the FST controller
››Externally by the GST Group Controller or the LMS Lift Monitoring System
FIREMAN SERVICE Fireman service mode has been activated. Possible causes of signal:
››Key switch fireman service in car operating panel (FPM-1 X4.4 / FPM-2 X2.13)
››Programmable I/O port of the FST controller
››The state was saved after a power failure and has been reconstructed. The
Fireman Mode Reset function must be executed to reset this state.
››Key switch on landing call panel (ADM input X3.12 / X3.13)
››GST Group Controller (see GST manual)
FILE TRANSFER ACTIVE The controller is in data transmission mode to transfer files to a GST Group
Controller or to a PC.
Attendant operation The attendant controller is active.
INSPECTION MODE The controller is in inspection mode (input FSM-2 X22.2).
Attention: Line A of the FST display must show EMERGENCY STOP CAR!
CALIBRATION -- The calibration drive has been started. A ticker text displays the status.
After completion of a successful calibration drive, the message CALIBRATION
OK! appears. If the drive is interrupted prematurely, CALIBRATION ABORT!
appears. Find the error in the error list and repeat the calibration drive.
APRON-EXTENDED! The car apron is open (due to a shaft door interruption). Monitoring is performed
via a programmable input on the FST controller.
LEARN DRIVE-ABORT! The learn drive has been aborted due to an error. Find the error in the error list
and repeat the learn drive.
LEARN DRIVE ACTIVE The controller performs a learn drive.
LEARN DRIVE-START The controller starts a learn drive.
LEARN DRIVE-OK! The learn drive has been completed successfully.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 25

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Display Description
SAFETY CURTAIN The safety curtain replacing the car door has been interrupted. The contact is
in the safety circuit instead of the car door contacts (see System description –
Safety curtain).
DRM A runtime monitoring error has occurred, the installation is brought to a standstill.
Possible reasons include, among others:
››Start-up problems
››Runtime monitoring
››Encoder failure
››Car communication
››Speed end switch
››Zone missing
››Motor failure
››Forced stop
››Emergency end switch
››Door failure
››Drive error
››Special I/O port
INSTALLATION MODE The controller is in installation mode.
EMERGENCY END SWITCH The top emergency end switch is interrupted (FST X14.6, X14.7)
ORIENTATION Only incremental positioning:
After switching on, the controller performs an orientation drive to an end floor.
The orientation drive can take place automatically or when the first call is placed.
PARKING ACTIVE The controller sends the car to the programmed parking floor.
LANDING PRIORITY A priority landing drive has been triggered. Possible causes of signal:
››Key switch on landing call panel (ADM input X3.12 / X3.13)
››Programmable input on the FST controller
››Programmable input on an external RIO module
CAR PRIORITY A priority car drive has been triggered. Possible causes of signal:
››Key switch on car operating panel (FPM-1 X4.37 / FPM-2 X1.13)
››Automatically after a type Auto 2 priority landing drive
AUXILIARY MODE The controller is in auxiliary mode (input FST X18.2).
Attention: Line A of the FST display must show EMERGENCY STOP!
HOMING ACTIVE The hydraulic lift is sent to the lowest landing.
SERVICE MODE! The controller is in service mode.

SERVICE REQUIRED! One of the service counters has exceeded a set limit.
SYSTEM STOP The controller has been stopped via the FST menu.
OVER LOAD The overload input on the FSM or on a programmable input is active.
USER ERROR A user error has occurred (you can define up to three error messages as user
errors). The number of the error is displayed.
USER ERROR 0 A user error has occurred (you can define up to three error messages as
user errors). The number of the error is displayed.
USER ERROR 1 A user error has occurred (you can define up to three error messages as
user errors). The number of the error is displayed.
USER ERROR 2 A user error has occurred (you can define up to three error messages as
user errors). The number of the error is displayed.
V.I.P. MODE The controller is in VIP mode. The source for the VIP mode can be:
››LMS via protocol adapter module
››Programmable input on the FST controller
››FPM-2 X2.14 in the car operating panel
FULL LOAD The full load input on the FSM is active.

26 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

3.2.4 Line C – Status messages

Line C is divided into two parts and displays one of the following status messages in the left part and one in the
right part. This way you can select which two status messages you want shown simultaneously on the display.
Select the status message in the left-hand area with +�, in the right-hand area with +�.

Status Display Description

Car doors <A> Door A completely open
>A< Door A completely closed
{A} Door A is opening
}A{ Door A is closing
<A*> Photocell or reversing contact door A active
<A#> Reversing contact door A active
<AX> Door A is locked (test menu)
<AL> Door is in loading mode (loading button has been pressed)
-A- Door A is stopped
?A? State of door A is unknown (check door end switches)
{{}} Door open button active
}}{{ Door close button active
<{}> Door open button permanently pressed
>}{< Door close button permanently pressed
Shaft positioning Z Zone message active
F Zone message missing
- Car is in levelled position
'''@'' Car position relative to level position (2.5 mm / pixel)
† Bottom correction switch active
° Top correction switch active
Car position P=6200 Current car position in relation to the level position of the
bottom floor in mm.
Levelling Pd= -2 Current position of the car relative to closest level position in
[mm].
Car speed V=1300 Current speed of the car in [mm/s]
Set / actual speed @''''''V2 Comparison between set and actual speed of the car. The left
bar is a graphic display of the relation between actual speed
and the set speed on the right.
Motor-Hours BS=4351 Motor hours of the drive
Drive counter FZ=123456 Number of completed drives
Load measurement L=100 kg Displays the current car load (only in combination with LCS)
Memory occupied Rec: 45% Memory occupied on the PC-Card when recording.

The door states marked with A also apply to doors B and C.

3.2.5 Line C - Diagnostic messages

Line C can be switched from status messages to diagnostic messages with button combination +�+�. To
page within the diagnostic messages, use the +� or +� button combinations.

Display Description
LIK-Errs:00000 00000 Absolute positioning only:
Diagnostics of the absolute encoder function (see „Absolute encoder
function“ page 29).
ENC:10000000[989680] Real-time display of the counted increments of the encoder on plug
X2. Together with the travelled path, the counted increments can be
used to calculate the resolution that is to be set.
The first value corresponds to the decimal value; the second value ([ ])
corresponds to the hex value.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 27

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Display Description
Gray=43210 KO KU ZB Current state of the magnet switch during incremental positioning (see
„State of incremental positioning“ page 29).
Door-A: F1=00 F2=00 Current state of the FSM-2 for door A (see „States of the FSM-2 car
top control module“ page 29).
Door-B: F1=00 F2=00 Current state of the FSM-2 for door B (see „States of the FSM-2 car
top control module“ page 29).
Door-C: F1=00 F2=00 Current state of the FSM-2 for door C (see „States of the FSM-2 car
top control module“ page 29).
Motor=00 VST=0000 Control-internal drive state and the states of the pre-control contact
outputs (see „Controller-internal drive states“ page 30).
Kop:Virt=0b Real=00 Generated and actually measured position messages of the car (see
„Position messages“ page 31).
SHK= ZbaABCNK State of the safety circuit (see „Position messages“ page 31)

Mgr1:Drv=00 Call=00 NEW LIFT internal diagnostic message

Mgr2:A=02 B=00 C=00 NEW LIFT internal diagnostic message
NextPoss=ff VT=V2 Next possible floor that can be driven to and the current set drive
speed (see „Next possible floor and current set speed“ page 32).
Port EXIN1=EGALPUDR State of input EXIN1 (see „Input EXIN1“ page 33).
Port EXIO2=76543210 State of input EXIN2 (see „Input EXIO2“ page 33).
Port H8IN1=ZBSMVO State of input H8IN1 (see „Input H8IN1“ page 33).
FSM-X6: L=1 V=0 K=0 State of the outputs on the FSM-2 X8 and X19 (see „FSM-X6“ page
33).
SRC:00 00 00 00 00 Source of the fireman mode, fireman service, landing control OFF,
remote shutdown and service mode special drive signals (see „Source
of the special drive signals“ page 34).
LWE: 255% E0 F0 O0 State of the weight sensor without LCS (see „Weight sensor“ page
35).
LCS: 123456 E0 F0 O0 State of the weight sensor with LCS. 123456 corresponds to the raw
value of the A/D converter coming from the LCS. Used for checking
the function of the weight sensor.
[Link]=........ State of the project-related program parts (in-plant).
Media S0:1 S1:0 U:0 State of the memory media (see „Memory media“ page 36).
Pkt/s In=005 Out=002 Incoming and outgoing data packets of the FST controller in packets/
sec.
ASV: 0000000 P=[00] State of the pawl-control (see „State of the pawl-control“ page 36).
IN=0000 0000 00 #00 or 0000 0000 00 shows the last received/sent DCP data to/from the
OUT=0000 0000 00 #00 FST in HEX.
#00 corresponds to the counter for current DCP transmission errors.
CMM: Module-01 =OK State of the monitored LON modules
OK: module responds
Fail: module does not respond
OFF: CMM is switched off
FSM T= 01 R= 02 Counter that represents the round trip time of transmission (T) and
receipt (R) of the data between FST and FSM. Both values should be
approximately in sync with one another, i.e., the counter values should
differ by no more than one.

28 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Absolute encoder function

LIK-Errs:00000 00000
The two numbers in the display indicate the number of encoder errors that have occurred since the last time the
system was turned on. The left number shows the different values resulting from the double scanning; the right
number shows the number of failed plausibility checks. Sporadic errors are compensated by the FST software
and can be tolerated. A continuous increase of one of the values indicates a hardware error of the encoder or
cable.

Left number:

Display Description
00000 or constant value Communication between FST controller and absolute encoder is working
correctly. Double scanning for suppressing electrical interference shows no
deviations.
Constantly increasing value Double scanning for suppressing electrical interference shows deviations.
Electrical interference is present on the connection cable between FST and
encoder. Check connection cables, inform NEW LIFT service line.

Right number:

Display Description
00000 The position values of the absolute encoder are plausible (are within the
regular shaft). There are no invalid jumps in the position value.
RANGE The position values of the absolute encoder are not plausible (are outside of
the regular shaft). Check the direction of rotation of the encoder and commis-
sion absolute positioning (see "Installation and Commissioning manual").
DELTA There are invalid jumps in the position value. The absolute encoder is mechan-
ically defective.

State of incremental positioning

Gray=43210 KO KU ZB
Code Description
43210 State of the Gray-encoded pre-end switch for high-speed units (optional)
KO Top correction switch TC is active
KU Bottom correction switch BC is active
ZB Zone switch B is active

States of the FSM-2 car top control module

Door-A: F1=00 F2=00, Door-B: F1=00 F2=00, Door-C: F1=00 F2=00

Each number encodes four input states (bits) of the F1/F2 table with its hexadecimal value. The decimal value
of the number corresponds to the sum of the values of the activated functions according to the following tables.

Bit Digit Value Set F1 = Byte F1

0 Digit 1 1 Active Configured car top control module FSM
1 (right digit) 2 Active Door locked
2 4 Active Door reversing
3 8 Door completely open End switch "door open"

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 29

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Bit Digit Value Set F1 = Byte F1

4 Digit 2 1 Door completely closed End switch "door closed"
5 (left digit) 2 Active Photocell interrupted
6 4 Active Reversing contact
7 8 Active Empty load input

Bit Digit Value Set F2 = Byte F2

0 Digit 1 1 Active Car lighting sensor•
1 (right digit) 2 Active Inspection signal "fast"
2 4 Active Inspection signal "down"
3 8 Active Inspection signal "up"
4 Digit 2 1 Active Inspection signal "ON"
5 (left digit) 2 Active Door closing motor
6 4 Active Door opening motor
7 8 Active Door ready for drive

• Signal only relevant for door versions A and B.

Short instructions on converting from binary to hexadecimal values as well as a corresponding value table:
(see „6.2 Bit calculation“ page 138).

Example: status byte F1 = 6c and status byte F2 = 21

SAFETY CCT CLOSED A

B
Door-A: F1=6c F2=21 C
00 [Link]
D

This results in the following hexadecimal numbers, values and, thus, active bits:
F1: Digit 1 = hex: c → decimal: 12 = 8 + 4 → bit 3 and bit 2 active
→doors reversed; end switch “open” has switched
Digit 2 = hex: 6 → decimal: 6 = 4 + 2 → bit 6 and bit 5 active
→ photocell interrupted; reversing contact has switched
F2: Digit 1 = 1 → decimal: 1 = 1 → bit 0 active
→ car light sensor active
Digit 2 = 2 → decimal: 2 = 2 → bit 5 active
→ door motor - closing

Controller-internal drive states

Motor=02
The controller-internal drive state is decoded according to the following table:

Value Drive states

00 Drive ready
01 Drive starting
02 Drive operating
03 Drive approaching stop position
04 Drive braking

30 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Value Drive states

05 Drive stopping

VSt=0000
The four-digit, hexadecimal-encoded display describes the states of the pre-selection relays in real-time accor-
ding to the following table. The hex value is decoded digit-by-digit as described in (see „States of the FSM-2 car
top control module“ page 29).

Bit Digit Value Set VST = pre-selection relay

0 Digit 1 1 Active Output FST K0
1 (right digit) 2 Active Output FST K1
2 4 Active Output FST K2
3 8 Active Output FST K3
4 Digit 2 1 Active Output FST K4
5 2 Active Output FST K5
6 4 Active Output FST K6
7 8 Active Output FST K7
8 Digit 3 1 Active Output FST K8
9 2 Active Output FST K9
10 4 Active Output FST K10
11 8 Active Output FST K11
12 Digit 4 1 Active Output FST K12
13 (left digit) 2 Active Zone signal B
14 4 Active Safety circuit bypass FST K20
15 8 Active Enable zone switching FST K21

Short instructions on converting from binary to hexadecimal values as well as a corresponding value table can
be found Chapter 6.2 Bit calculation (see „6.2 Bit calculation“ page 138).

Example: status byte motor = 02 and status byte VSt = 000a

SAFETY CCT CLOSED A

B
Motor=02 VSt=000a C
00 [Link]
D

Motor: 02 → drive is operating

VSt: Digit 1 = a → decimal: 10 = 8 +2 → bit 3 and bit 1 active
→ output FST K3 and FST K1 active
Digit 2 - 4 = 0 → no active bits

Position messages
Kop: Virt=0b Real=00
The generated (virtual) and actual (real) position messages of the car describe in hexadecimal coding the state
of eight switches each (bits) in real-time according to the following tables. The hex value is decoded digit-by-
digit as described in (see „States of the FSM-2 car top control module“ page 29).

Bit Digit Value Set Virt = virtual position

0 Digit 1 1 Active Level (A and B)
1 (right digit) 2 Active Level (A and B) with drive stopped
2 4 Active Approach area
3 8 Active Zone switch B (FST K23)

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 31

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Bit Digit Value Set Virt = virtual position

4 Digit 2 1 Active Relevelling "up"
5 (left digit) 2 Active Relevelling "down"
6 4 Active Enable zone switching (FST K21)
7 8 Not assigned

Bit Digit Value Set Real = real position

0 Digit 1 1 Active Zone signal FST (K22 & FST K23 active simultaneously)
1 (right digit) 2 Active Top correction switch TC (incremental positioning)
2 4 Active Bottom correction switch BC (incremental positioning)
3 8 Active Level at bottom BU (incremental positioning, optional)
4 Digit 2 1 Active Level at top BO (incremental positioning, optional)
5 (left digit) 2 Active Brake monitoring (FST X1.19, X1.20)
6 4 Active Motor monitoring (FST X1.22)
7 8 Active Zone switch B (incremental positioning)

Short instructions on converting from binary to hexadecimal values as well as a corresponding value table can
be found in (see „Bit calculation“ page 138).

States of the safety circuit

FST: ShK=ZbaABCNK

Display Description
Shk= Emergency stop car open
Shk= K Emergency stop open
Shk= NK Car door C open
Shk= CNK Car door B open
Shk= BCNK Car door A open
Shk= ABCNK Door lock A open
Shk= aABCNK Door lock B open
Shk= baABCNK Circuit board defect
Shk=ZabABCNK Safety circuit closed

Next possible floor and current set speed

NextPoss=ff
Next possible floor that can be approached is decoded from hexadecimal values according to the following
table:

Code Description NextPoss=

ff All floors possible (at rest)
fe No further floors possible (when decelerating)
00..3f Next possible floor = hexadecimal code

Vt=V2
The current set speed of the drive is decoded according to the following table:

Code Description Vt=

V1..V8 Drive speed 1 ... 8 (for normal drives)
ve Approach speed
Vi Fast inspection speed

32 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Code Description Vt=

Vn Relevelling speed

Input EXIN1
Port EXIN1=EGALDUR
Input EXIN1 displays the states of the controller inputs according to the following table:

Bit Terminal Set Description

R FST X18.2 Active Auxiliary mode control ON
U FST X18.3 Active Auxiliary mode control UP
D FST X18.4 Active Auxiliary mode control DOWN
L FST X1.14 Active Car lighting OFF
A FST X1.15 Active Landing control OFF
G – Active GST
I – Active Emergency call

Input EXIO2
Port EXIO2=76543210
I/O port EXIO2 displays the states of the freely programmable I/O port:

Bit Terminal Set Description

0 FST X1.4 Active Programmable I/O port 0
1 FST X1.5 Active Programmable I/O port 1
2 FST X1.6 Active Programmable I/O port 2
3 FST X1.7 Active Programmable I/O port 3
4 FST X1.8 Active Programmable I/O port 4
5 FST X1.9 Active Programmable I/O port 5
6 FST X1.10 Active Programmable I/O port 6
7 FST X1.11 Active Programmable I/O port 7

Input H8IN1
Port H8IN1=ZBSMUO
Input H8IN1 displays the inputs of the drive processor according to the following table:

Bit Terminal Set Description

0 Not assigned
1 Not assigned
O FSM-2 X13.1 Active Top correction switch "TC"
U FSM-2 X13.3 Active Bottom correction switch "BC"
M FST X1.22 Active Motor monitoring
S FST X1.23 Active Standstill monitoring
B FST X1.19/20 Active Brake monitoring
Z FST X13.9 Active Zone message

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 33

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

FSM-X6
FSM-X6: L=1 V=0 K=0
FSM-X6 displays the states of the following outputs of the car top control module:

Code Terminal Set L= car lighting

0 FSM-2 X19.1 Active Car lighting switched off
1 FSM-2 X19.1 Inactive Car lighting switched on

Code Terminal Set V= car ventilator

0 FSM-2 X19.4 Inactive Car ventilator switched off
1 FSM-2 X19.4 Active Car ventilator switched on

Code Terminal Set K= locking solenoid

0 FSM-2 X8.3 Inactive Locking solenoid released
1 FSM-2 X8.3 Active Locking solenoid activated

Source of the special drive signals

SRC:00 00 00 00
The fireman mode, fireman service, landing control OFF, lift off and service mode special drive signals can be
activated by various signal sources (e.g., ADM, FPM, etc.). The sources are displayed as follows:

SRC: 00 00 00 00 00
Source for "service mode"
Source for "remote shutdown"
Source for "landing control OFF"
Source for "fireman service"
Source for "fire signal"

Fig. 3.9: The signal sources of the SRC display

Decoding the source displays

Code Source for service mode signal

01 External via the LMS Lift Monitoring System
02 TEST MENU - Service Mode ON
04 Programmable I/O port of the FST controller

34 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Code Source for remote shutdown signal

01 Remote shutdown following a car lighting error
02 Input "Car Lighting OFF", FST X1.13
04 Programmable I/O port of a CUS module (external) or ADM
08 Programmable I/O port of the FST controller or RIO module (external)
10 Externally by the GST Group Controller or the LMS Lift Monitoring System

Code Source for landing control OFF signal

01 ¥ Button of the FST keypad
02 Programmable I/O port of a RIO module (external)
04 Input "Landing control OFF", FST X1.14
08 Programmable I/O port of the FST controller
10 Car operating panel module FPM-1, X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14
20 Landing call module ADM
40 Push-button mode (see „5.7.1 Special call mode“ page 123)

Code Source for fireman service signal

01 Car operating panel module FPM-1 X4.4 / FPM-2 X2.13
02 Programmable I/O port of the FST controller
04 State was saved after a power failure and has been restored
08 Landing call module ADM
10 GST group controller

Code Source for fireman mode signal

01 Landing call module ADM
02 Programmable I/O port of the FST controller
04 GST group controller

Weight sensor
LWE: 255% E0 F0 O0 or LCS: 123456 E0 F0 O0
The state of the weight sensor inputs and of the loading level of the car when using analogue weight sensors is
displayed as follows:

Either LWE: 255% E0 F0 O0

or LCS: nnnnn E0 F0 O0

State of the "overload" input, FSM X5.4

State of the "full load" input, FSM X5.3

State of the "empty load" input, FSM X5.2

Loading level of the car in %

(only for analogue weight sensors)

"0": input inactive

"1": input active

Fig. 3.10: State of the weight sensor

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 35

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

Memory media
Media S0:1 S1:0 U:0
Indicates whether a memory medium is present, 0 = not present, 1 = present

Code Description
S0: microSD card
S1: SD card (present, up to hardware version 3.2)
U: USB 2.0 / X41

State of the pawl-control

ASV: 0000000 P=[00]
The state of the pawl-control is decoded as follows:

Bit Set Description ASV: .......

0 (right) Active Pump for bolt control switched on
1 Active "Extend bolts" valve activated
2 Active "Retract bolts" valve activated
3 Active "Bolts extended" end switch is active
4 Active "Bolts retracted" end switch is active
5 Active "Car bottomed" input is active
6 (left) Active "Re-pump" input is active

Digit Code Meaning P=[..]

1 (right) 0 Standstill
1 (right) 1 Main contactors ON, wait for star/delta startup
1 (right) 2 Lift car (approx. 30 mm)
1 (right) 3 Motor run-on active
1 (right) 4 Wait for bolts to extend or retract
1 (right) 5 Bolts extended or retracted completely
1 (right) 6 Waiting for "car bottomed" input
1 (right) 7 Delay after stop
2 (left) 0 No bolt movement
2 (left) 1 Bolts are retracting
2 (left) 2 Bolts are extending
2 (left) 3 Re-pumping active
2 (left) 4 Error in bolt control

36 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LCD-Display and messages

3.2.6 Line D - Drive mode messages

Column Display Description
1 T Auto test drive active
S No serial connection to the frequency inverter (FST X11)
s Data transmission to the frequency inverter via serial connection is faulty (FST
X11)
2 ` Direction of travel UP
\ Direction of travel DOWN
3-4 10 Current floor for the car
5-8 [13] Car call and landing call on target floor
[13 Car call to target floor
13] Landing call to target floor
X13 Car control blocked
13X Landing control blocked
9 Not assigned
10 G FST is integrated in a GST Group Controller.
g FST is integrated in a GST Group Controller but communication with the GST is
faulty
s "Separated" group participants
P Drive temporarily stopped
11 R Flashes while recording data on the SD card
F Card is cleared
B Bank controller: user group active
9-11 FTX Data exchange from FST active (from FST to GST, LMS, etc.)
FRX Data exchange to FST active (from GST, LMS, etc. to FST)
12 Not assigned
13-20 [Link] Current time of the FST

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 37

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Information texts

3.3 Information texts

When triggering actions in the FST menu, information texts may appear in the display. They contain information
on the result of the respective action.

Display Description
EMERGENCY MODE! The controller is in emergency mode. Drives are not possible. Emer-
gency operation is activated by pressing the S button while switching
the system on.
ADM STUCK: Landing call button mechanically or electrically stuck. The call is
detected but not placed.
ADM unconfigured! A landing call module connected to the shaft bus is not configured.
Inform NEW LIFT service line!
DRIVE NOT READY Inverter "Ready" signal does not arrive via the DCP interface within 0.5
seconds.
DRIVE INHIBIT ON! Mutual start-up blocking via the LMS bus is active. Starting will be
delayed until the other networked systems have completed their accel-
eration phases.
ARM SW UPDATE ERROR Software update for the "ARM" drive processor failed. Repeat update
procedure. Otherwise inform NEW LIFT service line!
Landing call button stuck: The landing call from the specified floor and door side is permanently
03/A activated (is stuck). The message is repeated every minute until the
Car-call button stuck: 02/B error has been corrected.
PLEASE WAIT... The triggered action has not been completed. Please wait!
DIR NOT FOUND! Update file directory on external memory medium not found. Update
file "[Link]" must be located in the "update" folder.
DIR NOT OPENED! Update file directory could not be opened. Check update file and
directory.
UNPACKING FAILED Unpacking the ".tar" file failed. Check update file; the file may be
defective.
FANG RESET ACTIVATED Default function with FST-2XTs "on board". Action triggered via the
"FangReset" test menu. Relay K38 controls the reset coil of the
speed limiter. This can also optionally be performed via an I/O port.
ARREST TEST RUNNING... Activation of "FangTest-Automatik" via the test menu. Arrest floor
and offset are to be set under Main Menu/Config/Installa-
tion/. Following activation, keep "" pressed down.
FAX/SMS SENT OK! A status fax was sent successfully via the modem interface.
FAX/SMS -> GST! A fax/SMS (text message) is sent to the group controller where it will
be sent via the FAX-modem.
FEH_ LIST TRANSFER ER Transfer of the FST error list ([Link] file) faulty.
FEH_ LIST TRANSFER OK Transfer of the FST error list ([Link] file) triggered via Main Menu/
System/Copy to/Error List-> USB successfully completed.
FILE NOT FOUND! The inserted PC-Card does not contain the file(s) required for the trig-
gered action.
FST Software Update An FST software update with a USB 2.0 memory medium is being
performed. The progress is displayed in %.
GST UPDATE COMPLETE! The software update of the GST Group Controller has been completed
successfully.
ZONE IS INCORRECT! The zone measured during the learn drive is too long (max - 300mm to
+300mm)
Calibration abort! The calibration drive was aborted. Check function of connected drive
speeds. Locate reason for drive abort in the error list.
NO <KO> SIGNAL! The car is on the top floor and the correction top signal is missing (only
incremental positioning). Check function of TC switch. Check settings
in MAIN MENU / Positioning / Increm. Positioning /
KO/KU-Level.
NO <KU> SIGNAL! The car is on the bottom floor and the correction bottom signal is
missing (only incremental positioning). Check function of BC switch.
Check settings in MAIN MENU / Positioning / Increm. Posi-
tioning. / KO/KU-Level.

38 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Information texts

Display Description
CONFIG TRANSFER ERR! An error has occurred during copying of the controller configuration.
CONFIG TRANSFER OK! Controller configuration copied successfully.
CONFIG(D) CORRUPT! A parameter of the drive configuration is not plausible. Change a
parameter in MAIN MENU / Drive and undo the change again. The
information text disappears after saving the settings.
CONFIG(S) CORRUPT! A parameter of the system configuration is not plausible. Change a
parameter in MAIN MENU / Config and undo the change again. The
information text disappears after saving the settings.
LCS OFFSET DELETED All currently active weight offsets are deleted by the Main Menu/
Config/Weight Sensor/LCS Settings/Auto Adjust/LCS
Reset parameter.
LCS (L1) calibrated! The LCS empty load measurement was performed.
LCS (L2) calibrated! The LCS reference load measurement was performed.
LCS re-calibrated! Re-calibration was performed. Activation via Main Menu/Config/
Weight Sensor/LCS Settings/Correct Offset
LON INTERFACE ERROR Sent or received data of the LON bus are faulty or completely missing
LON bus communication
RESET LON After "LON INTERFACE ERROR", restart of the LON controller
LON INTERFACE OK! LON controller OK after "RESET LON" (restart)
LEARN DRIVE FAILURE! The started learn drive was not successful. Check function of signals
zone B, bottom correction (BC) and top correction (TC). Locate reason
for drive abort in the error list.
LEARN DR. START FAILURE! The started learn drive was aborted due to the car not moving even
with pre-selection active.
DRM–TEST STARTED! A DRM test was triggered.
DRM–TEST FINISHED! The DRM test was not completed successfully.
CAR NUISANCE DETECT! The car nuisance protection function has triggered.
See MAIN MENU / Config / Anti Nuisance.
FAX/SMS NOT SENT! [FAX/SMS] Transmission of a status fax via the modem interface was aborted.
Check modem and telephone connection. MAIN MENU / Config /
Modem/Fax/LMS
NOT IN THE ZONE! The started learn drive cannot be performed because the car is not in
the door zone of the bottom floor. Check function of zone B signal and
settings in MAIN MENU / Positioning / Increm. Positng. /
ZoneB-Level.
NOT IN FLOOR-0! The started learn drive cannot be completed because the car is not on
the bottom floor (check bottom correction switch, BC).
NOT FROM THIS FLOOR! The car is at an end floor. The end switch test cannot be started from
this floor.
EMERG.-CALL PRESSED An emergency call button was pressed or is defective (see wiring
diagram).
ONLY FROM END FLOOR! The triggered DRM test can only be started from an end floor.
REC. ALREADY STOPPED Repeated execution of the Main Menu/System/Recorder/
Recorder STOP parameter even though it was already stopped.
RECORD TRANSFER ERR! Copy operation of the record file faulty.
RECORD TRANSFER OK! Copy operation of the record file successfully completed.
RECORDING RE-START! An already-started recording was restarted.
RECORDING STOPPED! Recording was stopped.
RECORDING NEW START! Recording is restarted.
SD CARD REMOVED An SD card was removed.
SD CARD OK The inserted SD card is OK.
UNKNOWN SD CARD The inserted SD card is unknown.
KEYPAD LOCKED Keypad of the FST locked. Unlock with the "S" button.
KEYPAD UNLOCKED Keypad of the FST unlocked.
TRANSFER RUNNING! Data transfer to external USB memory medium.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 39

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Information texts

Display Description
UCM-A3 TEST... A UCM-A3 test was triggered in the up or down direction in the test
menu.
UNKNOWN DIR ERROR Directory on external memory medium cannot be read or cannot be
found.
UPDATE COMPLETE! The software update of the LON modules was completed successfully.
USB stick REMOVED A USB was removed from X41.
USB stick PLUGGED IN A USB stick was plugged into X41.
USB stick OK The USB stick that was plugged into X41 is detected by the FST-2XT
controller.
USB stick UNKNOWN The USB stick that was plugged into X41 is not detected by the FST-2XT
controller. Only USB 2.0 sticks with FAT32 formatting and maximum size
of 32GB are to be used.
*** WARNING *** General warning notice scroll text; in connection with various plain text
messages.
WAITING TO RESET... Automatic Reset after changing a basic parameter (e.g. Drive type).
This may take a few seconds.
EXCESSIVE SLIPPAGE!! During the last drive of the learn drive, hysteresis of the connected
magnet switches TC, BC and zone B was detected (only incremental
positioning). This message appears if the result of the measurement is
greater than 10 mm. Hysteresis will then automatically be limited to 10
mm.
DOOR-NUDGING! Nudging (forced closure) of the car door is active. Photocell and
reversing contacts are ignored. See MAIN MENU / Doors /
Doors-Selective / Photocell and MAIN MENU / Doors /
Doors-Selective / Nudge Time.

40 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 FST-2XT/s controller user interface
Information texts

3.3.1 Information page

The information page contains important information on the individual configuration of your FST controller.
It can be accessed with the + button combination and closed with . � and � serve for navigation
within the information page.

- - FST INFORMATION - - - A
HW Ver. :FST-2XT B
SW Ver. :V2.000-0102 C
:19/08/2014
D

Messages in lines B, C and D

Display Description
HW Ver. : FST-2XTs Hardware version of the FST board
SW Ver. : V2.000-0102 Software version with release date
: 19/08/2014
Boot Ver : [Link] Software version of the operating system
DRV Ver. : 0102 Software version of the drive system
FSM Ver. : Software version of the FSM car top control module. If no software version is
displayed here, there is no bus connection to the FSM.
FPM Ver. : Software version of the FPM car panel module. If no software version is
displayed here, there is no bus connection to the FPM.
LiftID :A Internal identification of the controller. The ID displayed here must corre-
spond to the jumper settings on the FSM and FPM.
MAC.. Hardware address of the FST as unique identifier for the network connection
[Link]
Neuron-ID.. Unique ID for identification of the FST
07 00 05 90 0B 01
Installation ID. System location or name
64-etage-simulator
NEW-Factory No. Order number of the individual lift system
RC12/2005
Mem:12936 Cach.1404 Free "memory" and currently used "cache" memory of the FST
Start:01/08/11 12:00 Date and time of the last activation
Cal :27/05/13 15:27 Date and time of last calibration drive
Stats:07/08/13 09:44 Start date and time of the current statistics recording
Cfg :01/08/11 12:06 Date and time of the last change of a parameter in the FST menu
CfgBk:23/06/12 00:57 Date and time of the current backup in the internal buffer
Err :25/06/99 03:45 Date and time of the last error list reset
[Link] Active security level of the FST
- - GST INFORMATION - - - Only occurs if FST is member of a group
GST SW :V2.080-0020 GST (group controller) software version with release date
:08/08/2014
Start:04/09/14 07:13 Date and time of the last activation of the GST

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 41

FST-2XT/s controller user interface
LEDs

3.4 LEDs
Three LEDs on the front panel of the FST controller display the device status.

LED Colour State Reason Action

FST Green On The power supply is on
The hardware of the FST
controller is working correctly
Off No power supply Check the 24V power supply of
the FST controller
The hardware of the FST Contact the NEW LIFT service line
controller is faulty
STATUS Green On The drive processor is working
correctly
Flashing Landing control OFF
� switches landing control back
on
Off Fault in drive processor Contact the NEW LIFT service line
ERROR red On Drive not possible Line B shows the reason of the
error. A drive is only possible after
the error has been corrected.
Flashing One or more errors were added to The ERROR LED switches off
the error list after the error list is called up
Off There is no error or event

You can find more information on other LEDs on the FST (see „4.2.3 LEDs“ page 52).

42 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Component overview – bus plan

4 Technical data
The FST-2XT and FST-2XTs lift controllers are the result of years of product experience in the area of controller
design for lift systems and close collaboration with various component manufacturers, the technical regulatory
authorities and our customers.
The individual components of the FST-2XT and FST-2XTs lift controllers are described and dimensions, jum-
pers, LEDs, terminals and plugs explained.

4.1 Component overview – bus plan

For each lift system, NEW LIFT prepares an overview of the individual components, the so-called bus plan,
which is included with the wiring diagram. Specified in the bus plan for each electronics assembly are the
installation location, the associated bus affiliation and, with LON bus cables, the respective cable length. Each
electronics assembly is clearly designated on the circuit board. Using this designation, the assignment between
the individual components and the bus plan is performed.

control cabinet HHT only;

remains open, no terminator

FST-2XT A
X2 HHT HHT
X5 X6 X3 X30
car

T T
travelling cable 30,0 m X30 X23
green FSM-2
LON module sticker floor X12
black

ADM-S S/0/A/5/A
4 LCS
blue
car top box
ADM-D D/0/A/4/A 3 black
blue
FPM
ADM-D D/0/A/3/A 2 FPM-2
blue

ADM-S S/0/A/2/A 1 EAZ

blue

EAZ Z/0/A/1/A 0 T
SAM
blue

ADM-S S/0/A/0/A -1 car operating panel

T
heat-shrink sleeing colors of bus cables
T: terminator
Fig. 4.1: Bus plan FST-2XT FST-2XTs controller 0,5 m = black
LON module sticker 1,0 m = red
3,0 m = white
5,0 m = yellow
type / bus / door / floor / FST 7,0 m = blue
module typ S / 0 / A / 5 / A 10,0 m = green
FST-ID 15,0 m = black
S: ADM-S
D: ADM-D
20,0 m = red
Z: EAZ bus door side floor: 25,0 m = white
X: ADM-XF oder XK 0 = bottom floor 30,0 m = yellow

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 43

Technical data
FST controller

4.2 FST controller

The FST controller can be used to operate all common types of cable and hydraulic lifts. The pre-assembled
FST controller can easily be adapted to any given lift system on-site using the FST menu. New software versi-
ons can easily be installed at any time via the USB 2.0 port without changing system-specific settings. The FST
controller includes the following components and features:

4.2.1 Technical details and data

››FST-2XT/s main circuit board with separate processors for call processing (32-bit), drive control and bus
management
››Integrated repeater for electrical isolation of shaft and car bus
››RS-485 / RS-422 / regulator interface for communication with drive regulators
››Encoder interface for connecting common absolute and incremental encoders
››Flash memory and battery-buffered RAM for an error list with up to 100 entries
››USB 2.0 type-A port for using USB memory media to download and update data
››USB 2.0 mini-B as PC interface (laptop on-site)**
››RS-232 modem interface (remote data transmission, FAX, PAM or laptop on-site)
››RS-485 CANopen Lift (CiA 417)
››Network connection - Ethernet RJ45 LAN 10/100 MBit
››Onboard microSD card for permanent, long-term recording of system activities for up to 31 days as well as for
recording various statistics and the error list
››240x320 TFT display with 262K colours as split-screen for configuration and menu actions and for navigation
and lift status displays using the NEW LIFT Guide
››Keypad for intuitive navigation in the main menu, Test menu and Guide menu
››8 programmable I/O ports on the FST main circuit board
››72 programmable I/O ports on additional RIO modules spread over the switching cabinet or car top box
››Onboard relays for manual or automatic triggering via the Test menu of the speed limiter using the NEW LIFT
FAT Assistant**
››Integrated operating elements for auxiliary mode control as well as manual evacuation drive, brake test and
control of external safety devices for reduced shaft head and/or shaft pit**
››Emergency mode monitor for the freeing of persons acc. to EN81-A2
››Levelled evacuation stop assistant for the freeing of persons**
››Button lock against accidental actuation
See the controller description for an overview of the features and functions of the FST controller.

Description Value
Supply voltage 24 V DC ±10%
Typical power consumption 300 mA
Max. fuse rating of the 230V/50Hz inputs (Characteristic B) 4A
24VDC / GND open collector outputs Short circuit-proof
Length x width x depth 310 x 200 x 50 mm
500 x 106 x 101 mm**
Temperature range: Storage & transport / operation -20 – +70 °C / ±0 – +60 °C
Relative humidity: Storage & transport / operation +5 – +95 % / +15 – +85 %
(non-condensing)

The jumper, terminal and socket settings listed here are default values and apply only if no deviations
are specified in the wiring diagram.

44 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

All settings marked with  are the settings set on delivery.

If marked with **, only possible with FST-2XTs!

200

27,5 145 27,5

82,5 62,5

X1 X40 J90 X9

J1
FST
SAFETY CCT CLOSED
STATUS
>A< '''@'''
01 [Link] ERROR X43

X41

USB-Host

CAN
85

J2 USB-Slave J110 X11

X42

Func

JS
Drive Select
+ J120 X12

Enter
X2

J131
J133
J135
J136
85

X3
Shift
J131
J133
J135
J136
X4

X5 X13
310

B A A B C H
ZU
SP SP TK TK TK NH N
SK FK
X6

X14 X15 K20

K21
X30 X16

X32

K22

X17 X18 X19

K23
X.
120

K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 K5 K6 K7 K8 K9 K10 K11 K12 K13

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC

24 V DC
230 V AC

X20 X21

10 77 103 10

Fig. 4.2: FST-2XT controller

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 45

Technical data
FST controller

106

X2
HHT

X7 X41

SAFETY CCT CLOSED

95
>A<
01
[Link]

215
9
FUNC Select

8
1

F
X4

7
2

Drive S

6
1

X26
2

5
3

Enter

4
300
4

310
5
6

2
OUT
Shift
7

IN 1
8

4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

F1 F2
X25
S998

3
S25

2
1
X1

S140

A
S205

B
S141

S206

BR
1 EVAC 0 TEST R1/R2
2
X24
S143/S207
S1000

492,5
500
1

AUX
X18

0
3
K37
K38

1 1
4
NH
LT
ZU

B
C
A
SP
1

TK
TK
TK

NH
SK

FK

X5 X6 X3

1 X23 2 3 4 5 6 X27 2 3 4 X28 2 3

2 X13 14

J131
J133 K23
J135
J136
X16
3

K22
5 4

1 2 3 4
X30

K21
7

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
X17

K20
13 12 11 10 9
X19

1 2 3 4

1 3 4 6 7 8 X15 2 3 5 6 7
X14

D22 X32
K14
K10
K11
K12
K7
K8
K9

K1
K2
K3
K4
K0
K5
K6

K13
7,5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
X21

X20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

91 7,5
Fig. 4.3: FST-2XTs controller

46 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

106

7,5

D320
D330
R50
D19
T7 R15 C151 C149
D70
A32 A1

C32 C1
U15

C45
U12 U55

U3

U10
F1
F1
U7
L4 J90

95
Q5
U13

105
C156
C156
C157
L2 C155
C154
C167
C161 U31
C162
C158
C199
C197
C196 U36
C193 C200
C192 L3 C194
C195
C198
U44
MP3
J100 J110

BUZZ1

215
9
D49

8
K31

X26

7
R285
2

6
1
K32

D48
2

5
R86
3

4
R92 D4
300
4

R93 D8 K33

310
5

R94 D10

K30
6

R95 D11

2
7

K28

1
8

R81 D12

4
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

R82 D13

3
D209

X25
R90 K34
R91 D210

2
1
C1
X1

R147
R156
R157
R159

R125
R113
R112

K36

R126 U16
R244
U8
R163
R162
R161
R160

X24

R247
R248 U34
1

492,5
R146 U38
X18

R145 U33 R166

500
R127
1

R164
U58
2

R165
R181
3
K29
K37
K38

R131
U2
R287
R218
U1 R231
R230

K35
X5 X6 X3

X23 2 3 4 5 6 X27 2 3 4 X28 2 3

X13
2 X13 14

J131
J133 K23
J135
J136
X16
3

K22
5 4

1 2 3 4
X30

K21
7
X17

0 1 2 3 4 5 6
8
13 12 11 10 9

K20

1 2 3 4
X19
X14

1 3 4 6 7 8 X15 2 3 5 6 7

D22 X32
K14
K10
K11
K12
K7
K8
K9

K1
K2
K3
K4
K0
K5
K6

K13
7,5

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
X21

X20

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

91 7,5

Fig. 4.4 FST-2XTs controller

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 47

Technical data
FST controller

101
7,5
105

101
82

40

Fig. 4.5: FST-2XTs controller

48 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

4.2.2 FST jumpers

FST-2XT jumper J1: service jumper

This jumper must always remain open.
FST-2XTs jumper J1: encoder - incremental / CAN Open LIFT

Function J1
Incremental 24V 1-2
CANopen Lift ground 2-3

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper J2: load measurement inputs

Function J2
Switched GND for load measurement inputs 1-2
Switched +24 V for load measurement inputs 2-3

FST-2XTs jumper J3: encoder - incremental / CAN Open LIFT

Function J3
Incremental 5V 1-2
CANopen Lift 24V 2-3

FST-2XTs jumper J4: encoder - incremental / CAN Open LIFT

Function J4
Incremental track A 1-2
CANopen Lift channel L 2-3

FST-2XTs jumper J5: encoder - incremental / CAN Open LIFT

Function J5
Incremental track A negated 1-2
CANopen Lift channel H 2-3

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper J90: shielding X9

This jumper is in the open position on delivery. Set only after consulting with NEW LIFT.
The shielding of service-PC cable X9 is connected to PE or GND potential with J90.

Function J90
Shielding of the connecting cable on PE 1-2
Shielding of the connecting cable on GND 2-3
Shielding of the connecting cable insulated Open

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 49

Technical data
FST controller

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper J100: shielding X43

This jumper is in the open position on delivery. Set only after consultation with NEW LIFT.
The shielding of modem cable X10 is connected to PE or GND potential with J100.

Function J100
Shielding of the connecting cable on PE 1-2
Shielding of the connecting cable on GND 2-3
Shielding of the connecting cable insulated Open

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper: shielding X11

This jumper is in the open position on delivery. Set only after consulting with NEW LIFT.

The shielding of DCP cable X11 is connected to PE or GND potential with J110.
Function J110
Shielding of the connecting cable on PE 1-2
Shielding of the connecting cable on GND 2-3
Shielding of the connecting cable insulated Open

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs J120: shielding X12

The shielding of encoder cable X12 is connected to PE or GND potential with J120.

Function J120
Shielding rotary encoder cable on PE 1-2
Shielding rotary encoder cable on GND 2-3

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper J131-J136: definition of the shaft positioning

The position of the shaft positioning system (car or shaft) is defined with J131, J133, J135, J136.

50 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

Shaft positioning system on the car; FSM-2 X25:

››all jumpers are jumped to 1-2.

Shaft positioning system in the shaft or machine room; FST X12:

››all jumpers are jumped to 2-3
››depending on the type of shaft positioning, two (incremental positioning with zone magnets) or four (absolute
value positioning) freely travelling cable cores are available at terminal FSM-2 X15 / FST X13

Connection of the position encoder on the car; FSM-2 X25 Connection of the position encoder in the machine room; FST-2 X12
Jumper setting 1-2 Jumper setting 2-3
1 2 3 1 2 3

X13.1 X13.1
.2 TC .2 TC
.3 .3
.4 BC .4 BC
.5 .5
.6 .6

Positioning Positioning
B+ / DATA+

B+ / DATA+
B- / DATA-

B- / DATA-
A+ / CLK+

A+ / CLK+
A- / CLK-

A- / CLK-
J136 J136
X12.2 J135 X12.2 J135
.7 J133 .7 J133
.4 J131 .8 J131
.8 .4

FST-2 X30.16 .4 .3 .15 FST-2 X30.16 .4 .3 .15

FSM-2 X30.16 .4 .3 .15 FSM-2 X30.16 .4 .3 .15

X25.2 X25.2
.7 .7
.4 .4
.8 .8

up to four free travelling cable

cores; FSM-2 X15 / FST-2 X13
X15.1 X15.1
.2 .2
.3 if TC →.3
.4 necessary BC →.4

Fig. 4.6: Connection point of the position encoder and jumper setting J131, J133, J135, J136

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 51

Technical data
FST controller

4.2.3 LEDs
The LEDs listed in the following table are located on the FST controller next to terminal strips X2 - X4.

LED Colour State Description

IN Green Flashing Incoming data packets - LON bus
OUT Green Flashing Outgoing data packets - LON bus
LD8 Green On Power supply - group bus

The LEDs listed in the following table are located on the FST controller above terminal strips X14 - X15.

LED Colour State Description

SKZU Green On Safety circuit closed
SPB Green On Door lock or bolt contact door side B closed*
SPA Green On Door lock or bolt contact door side A closed
TKA Green On Car door contact of door side A closed
TKB Green On Car door contact of door side B closed
TKC Green On Car door contact of door side C closed
NHLT Green On Emergency stop shaft closed
FKNHLT Green On Emergency stop car closed

* Not present with FST-2XTs!

The LEDs listed in the following table are located on the FST controller above pre-selection relays K0 ... K12.

LED Colour State Description

LD21 K0 Green On Pre-selection relay K0 activated
LD22 K1 Green On Pre-selection relay K1 activated
LD23 K2 Green On Pre-selection relay K2 activated
LD24 K3 Green On Pre-selection relay K3 activated
LD25 K4 Green On Pre-selection relay K4 activated
LD26 K5 Green On Pre-selection relay K5 activated
LD27 K6 Green On Pre-selection relay K6 activated
LD28 K7 Green On Pre-selection relay K7 activated
LD29 K8 Green On Pre-selection relay K8 activated
LD30 K9 Green On Pre-selection relay K9 activated
LD31 K10 Green On Pre-selection relay K10 activated
LD32 K11 Green On Pre-selection relay K11 activated
LD33 K12 Green On Pre-selection relay K12 activated

52 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

4.2.4 Safety circuit bypass control

The safety bypass circuit is integrated on the FST circuit board (K20..K23) and enables car movements in the
door zone with open shaft and car doors. This makes approaching and relevelling with open doors possible.
The safety circuit bypass control requires two magnet switches on the car roof (Zone A (S27) and Zone
B (S28)).
The safety circuit bypass control can therefore only be activated and put into operation if both magnet switches
including the corresponding magnets are mounted and connected (see Installation and Commissioning manual).
If the two functions “Re-levelling with open doors” and “Approaching with open doors” are not required, the
safety circuit bypass control is not activated and the magnet switches Zone A and B are not required.
The safety circuit bypass control is activated by one or both of the following parameters in the FST menu if zone
switches A and B are mounted and connected:
MAIN MENU / Doors / Doors-Basic / Pre-Opening = YES
MAIN MENU / Drive / Relevelling = YES
Functionality
The relays K20, K21, K22, K23 are released in the initial state.
If the car approaches the target floor, K21 (zone enabling) is activated by the control.
If the car reaches the door zone, the magnet switches of zone A (S27) and zone B (S28) trigger and activate the
two relays K22 and K23. The relays K22 and K23 provide the zone message for the control (car is in the door
zone).
If the control software has received the zone message, bypass relay K20 is activated if required, thereby
causing K21 to release again. This relay state (K20 activated, K21 released, K22 activated, K23 activated)
bridges the door contacts in the safety circuit and allows drive movements with the doors open.
Checking the safety circuit bypass control
The safety circuit bypass control is designed so that malfunction of the two magnet switches is detected and
results in a system shutdown.
The two following error states must be checked after commissioning the safety circuit bypass control:
››Zone switch A (S27) is permanently open (disconnect FST X13.11)
››Zone switch A (S27) is permanently closed (bridge FST X13.11 with FST X1.24)
In both cases, the controller shuts down the system with error message DRM-MISSING ZONE (see Installation
and Commissioning manual).
LEDs
The LEDs listed in the following table are located to the right next to relays FST K20 ... K23.

LED Colour State Description

LD17 K20 Green On Bypass door zone
LD18 K21 red On Enable door zone
LD19 K22 yellow On Encoder - door zone A
LD20 K23 yellow On Encoder - door zone B

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 53

Technical data
FST controller

4.2.5 Terminal strips and sockets

The terminal strips are listed in numerical order.

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X1

FST: X1 Power supply / Messages

Inputs/outputs
1 +24 V / 2 A (supply voltage of FST)
2 GND
3 +24 V / 2 A (supply voltage of FST)
4 Programmable I/O port 0
5 Programmable I/O port 1
6 Programmable I/O port 2
7 Programmable I/O port 3
8 Programmable I/O port 4
9 Programmable I/O port 5
10 Programmable I/O port 6
11 Programmable I/O port 7
12 GND
13 Car lighting OFF
14 Landing calls OFF
15 GND
16 Temperature monitoring motor room
17 Overload
18 Full load
19 Monitoring of brake A
20 Monitoring of brake B
21 Drive monitoring
22 Motor monitoring
23 Standstill monitoring
24 +24 V / 2 A (supply voltage of FST)

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X2

The hand-held terminal is connected to socket X2 HHT.

FST: X2 Hand-held terminal

Pin 1 Bus signal A
Pin 2 Bus signal B
Pin 3 +24 V
Pin 4 GND

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X3

X3 is an option bus socket for special applications (e.g., RIO module).

FST: X3 Option bus

Pin 1 Bus signal A
Pin 2 Bus signal B
Pin 3 +24 V
Pin 4 GND

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X4

The power supply for the shaft Bus is fed in via X4.

FST: X4 Power supply shaft bus / Groups

Pin1 +24 V
Pin 2 GND

54 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs sockets X5, X6

Shaft bus side A is connected to X5, shaft bus side B is connected to socket X6.

FST: X5, X6 X5: shaft bus A

X6: shaft bus B
Pin 1 Bus signal A
Pin 2 Bus signal B
Pin 3 +24 V
Pin 4 GND

FST-2XTs socket X7 / USB 2.0 Mini-B

FST: X7 X7: slave, service PC interface

Pin 1 USB_S_DET (VBUS +5V)
Pin 2 USB_S_D- (Data-)
Pin 3 USB_S_D+ (Data+)
Pin 4 USB_S_ID (ID)
Pin 5 GND
Pin 6 GND
Pin 7 GND
Pin 8 GND
Pin 9 GND

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X9 /SUB-D

FST: X9 X9: Service PC / protocol adapter / modem (RS-232

interface)
1 DCD Data Carrier Detected
2 RxD Receive Data
3 TxD Transmit Data
4 DTR Data Terminal Ready
5 GND
6 DSR Data Set Ready
7 RTS Request To Send
8 CTS Clear To Send
9 RI Ring Indicator

For jumper settings, (see „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper J100: shielding X43“ page 50).

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X11 /SUB-D

FST: X11 DCP for regulator activation

1 Not assigned
2 Not assigned
3 Not assigned
4 + Tx
5 GND
6 Not assigned
7 + Rx
8 - Rx
9 - Tx

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 55

Technical data
FST controller

For jumper settings, (see „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs jumper: shielding X11“ page 50).

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X12 /SUB-D

FST: X12 Shaft positioning

1 GND
2 INK A+ / ABS CLK +
3 GND
4 INK B+ / ABS DATA +
5 GND
6 +24 V
7 INK A - / ABS CLK -
8 INK B - / ABS DATA -
9 VCC +5 V

For jumper settings, (see „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs J120: shielding X12“ page 50).

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X13

FST: X13 Safety circuit bypass control (SCBC) /

TC BC for incremental positioning
1 FSM-2 X15.3 (only if J131 2-3)
2 Top correction switch "TC" (only for incremental positioning)
3 FSM-2 X15.4 (only if J133 2-3)
4 Bottom correction switch "BC" (only for incremental positioning)
5 FSM-2 X15.2 (only if J135 2-3)
6 FSM-2 X15.1 (only if J136 2-3)
7 SCBC zone release (with external SCBC)
8 SCBC zone bypass (with external SCBC)
9 SCBC zone signal (with external SCBC)
10 SCBC encoder zone switch A (always bridged with X13.11)
11 SCBC encoder zone switch A
12 SCBC encoder zone switch B
13 Simulation zone switch B (bridge with 13.12 if applicable)

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X14

FST: X14 Safety circuit query 1

1 Safety circuit closed
2 Door lock or bolt contact door side B closed (not with FST-2XTs)
3 Door lock or bolt contact door side A closed
4 Car door contact of door side A closed
5 Car door contact of door side B closed
6 Car door contact of door side C closed
7 Emergency stop shaft closed
8 Car emergency stop closed

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X15

FST: X15 Safety circuit query 2

1 Bypass UP
2 Bypass DOWN
3 L safety circuit
4 L safety circuit
5 Auxiliary mode bridging function
6 N safety circuit
7 Output bypass doors

56 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X16

FST: X16 Intercom

1 Intercom A or A
2 Intercom A or B
3 Intercom A or C
4 Intercom A or D

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X17

FST: X17 Emergency call device

0 +24 V or HSG +12 V (beginning of the emergency call loop)
1 Emergency call
2 Emergency power supply
3 GND
4 Level switch +
5 Level switch -
6 Emergency call line A
7 Emergency call line B

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X18

FST: X18 Auxiliary mode control 24 V

1 +24 V
2 Auxiliary mode control ON
3 Auxiliary mode control travel direction UP
4 Auxiliary mode control travel direction DOWN

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X19

FST: X19 Auxiliary mode control 230 V AC

1 Auxiliary mode control ON
2 Auxiliary mode control bridging function
3 L auxiliary mode control
4 Auxiliary mode control UP or DOWN

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X20

FST: X20 Pre-selection

1 Safety circuit "CLOSED"
2 N safety circuit
3 Pre-selection contact K0,K1 COM
4 Pre-selection contact K0 NO
5 Pre-selection contact K1 NO
6 Pre-selection contact K2, K3 COM
7 Pre-selection contact K2 NO
8 Pre-selection contact K3 NO
9 Pre-selection contact K4,K6 COM
10 Pre-selection contact K4 NO
11 Pre-selection contact K5 NO
12 Pre-selection contact K6 NO

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X21

FST: X21 Pre-selection

1 Pre-selection contact K7 - K8 COM
2 Pre-selection contact K7 NO

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 57

Technical data
FST controller

FST: X21 Pre-selection

3 Pre-selection contact K7 NC
4 Pre-selection contact K8 NO
5 Pre-selection contact K8 NC
6 Pre-selection contact K9, K11, K12 COM
7 Pre-selection contact K9 NO
8 Pre-selection contact K10 COM
9 Pre-selection contact K10 NO
10 Pre-selection contact K10 NC
11 Pre-selection contact K11 NO
12 Pre-selection contact K12 NO
13 Emergency call relay contact K13 COM1
14 Emergency call relay contact K13 NO1
15 Emergency call relay contact K13 NC1
16 Emergency call relay contact K13 COM2
17 Emergency call relay contact K13 NC2

FST-2XTs terminal strips X23

FST: X23 Speed limiter - remote triggering and resetting; activation via Test menu of
the FST
1 Triggering of relay K37 NC contact
2 Triggering of relay K37 COM contact
3 Triggering of relay K37 NO contact
4 Resetting of relay K38 NC contact
5 Resetting of relay K38 COM contact
6 Resetting of relay K38 NO contact

FST-2XTs terminal strips X24

FST: X24 Anti creep device - relay; activation via button F1 (S25)
1 Anti creep device relay K36 NC contact 230VAC
2 Anti creep device relay K36 NC contact 230VAC

FST-2XTs terminal strips X25

FST: X25 Anti creep device - relay; activation via button F1 (S25)
Evacuation - relay; activation via EVAC switch
1 Anti creep device relay K36 NO contact 230VAC
2 Anti creep device relay K36 NO contact 230VAC
3 Evacuation relay K31 NO contact 230VAC
4 Evacuation relay K31 NO contact 230VAC

FST-2XTs terminal strips X26

FST: X26 Brake test - relay; activation via BR TEST key switch (S143)
Evacuation - relay; activation via EVAC switch (S1000)
Brake A - relay; activation via button A (S140)
Brake B - relay; activation via button B (S141)
Monitoring contacts of the brake control
1 Brake test relay K34 NO contact 230VAC
2 Brake test relay K34 NO contact 230VAC
3 Monitoring contacts of relay K28(NO),33(NC),32(NC)
4 Brake B - relay K33 NO contact 230VAC
5 Monitoring contacts of relay K28(NO),33(NC),32(NC)
6 Brake A - relay K32 NO contact 230VAC
7 Evacuation relay K31 NO contact 230VAC

58 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
FST controller

FST: X26 Brake test - relay; activation via BR TEST key switch (S143)
Evacuation - relay; activation via EVAC switch (S1000)
Brake A - relay; activation via button A (S140)
Brake B - relay; activation via button B (S141)
Monitoring contacts of the brake control
8 Evacuation relay K31 NO contact 230VAC
9 Supply for evacuation/brake test 230VAC

FST-2XTs terminal strips X27

FST: X27 Protected area safeguarding for shaft head reset 1 (S205) and pit reset 2
(S206)
1 Shaft pit reset K29 NO contact 230VAC
2 Shaft pit reset K29 NO contact 230VAC
3 Shaft head reset K35 NO contact 230VAC
4 Shaft head reset K35 NO contact 230VAC

FST-2XTs terminal strips X28

FST: X28 Monitoring manual brake control

1 +24VDC
2 Input of the monitoring contacts of the external manual brake control
3 Output for contactor monitoring

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X30

FST: X30 Travelling cable

FSM-2: X30
1 +24 V
2 LON bus car A
3 Twisted with pin 15; assignment options:
twisted with pin 15 ››Incremental encoder on car: track B+
››Incremental encoder in shaft: bottom correction BC
››Absolute encoder on car: SSI DATA+
››Absolute encoder in shaft: freely available
4 Assignment options.
››Incremental encoder on car: track A-
››Absolute encoder on car: SSI CLK-
››Incremental or absolute encoder in shaft: freely available
5 Assignment options:
twisted with pin 17 ››Speak A
››Not assigned
6 Assignment options:
twisted with pin 18 ››Speak C
››Not assigned
7 Door zone encoder A
8 Telephone A
9 Assignment options:
››Incremental encoder on car: BC
››Level reference A
10 Emergency power +
11 GND
12 GND
13 Emergency call
14 LON bus car B

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 59

Technical data
FST controller

FST: X30 Travelling cable

FSM-2: X30
15 Assignment options:
twisted with pin 3 ››Incremental encoder on car: track B-
››Incremental encoder in shaft: top correction TC
››Absolute encoder on car: SSI DATA-
››Absolute encoder in shaft: freely available
16 Assignment options:
››Incremental encoder on car: track A+
››Absolute encoder on car: SSI CLK+
››Incremental or absolute encoder in shaft: freely available
17 ››Speak B
twisted with pin 5 ››Not assigned
18 ››Speak D
twisted with pin 6 ››Not assigned
19 Door zone encoder B
20 Telephone B
21 Incremental encoder on car: TC
Level reference B
22 + 24 V

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X32

FST: X32 Travelling cable

FSM-2: X32
1 Car door side A
2 Car door side B
3 Car door side C
4 Emergency stop car
5 Bypass UP
6 Bypass DOWN
7 Bypass ON
8 Bypass
9 N safety circuit

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X40 / RJ45

FST: X40 Network - Ethernet LAN 10/100MBit

1 TX+
2 TX-
3 RX+
4 Not assigned
5 Not assigned
6 RX-
7 Not assigned
8 Not assigned

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X41 / USB 2.0 Type -A

FST: X41 X41: host, USB port for USB 2.0 memory media
1 5V
2 USB_H_D- (Data-)
3 USB_H_D+ (Data+)
4 GND
5 GND
6 GND

60 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FST-2XT socket X42 / USB 2.0 type -B, currently without function

FST-2XT and FST-2XTs socket X43 /SUB-D

FST: X43 CAN Open LIFT interface

1 Not assigned
2 SEC_CAN_L
3 GND
4 Not assigned
5 GND
6 GND
7 SEC_CAN_H
8 Not assigned
9 +24VDC

4.3 Car top control module FSM-2

The FSM-2 car top control module forms the interface of the FST controller to all car signals. Signal exchange
between FSM-2 and FST takes place via the LON bus. The FSM-2 is installed either in the car top box or in the
car operating panel.
After switching off the main switch, parts of the car top control module are live:
››Plug X19 (car lighting) is not free of power until the car and shaft lighting supply line has been switched off!
››Plug X13 (emergency lighting) is not free of power until travelling cable plug X30 has been unplugged!

4.3.1 Technical data

Description Value
Supply voltage 24 V DC ±10%
Typical power consumption 300 mA
Outputs Short circuit-proof
Length x width x depth 250 x 140 x 34 mm
Temperature range: Storage & transport / operation -20 – +70 °C / ±0 – +60 °C
Relative humidity: Storage & transport / operation +5 – +95 % / +15 – +85 %
(non-condensing)

250
125
7,5 5
18

X10 X11 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17

K8 X12 X30
X24
K7 J25
X18
X9 X25
K6 X23
J112 X26
K5 X31
140

J81 X32
J71 K4
K11
JK1 X8
K3 X27 X19
JK2
JK3 K10
JT K2
X22 X21 K9
J5 K1
X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
X7 X20
J31
J21

Fig. 4.7 Car top control module FSM-2

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 61

Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

4.3.2 Jumpers
The service jumper J5 is not plugged in.

FSM-2 jumper J21: end switch “car door A closed”

Setting J21
End switch in series with coil K2 1-2
Without end switch (coil K2 at +24 V) 2-3

FSM-2 jumper J25: shielding - encoder cable X25

The shielding of encoder cable X25 is connected to PE or GND with jumper J25.

Function J25
Shielding rotary encoder cable on GND 1-2
Shielding rotary encoder cable on PE 2-3

FSM-2 jumper J31: end switch “car door A open”

Setting J31
End switch in series with coil K3 1-2
Without end switch (coil K3 at +24 V) 2-3

FSM-2 jumper J71: end switch “car door B closed”

Setting J71
End switch in series with coil K7 1-2
Without end switch (coil K7 at +24 V) 2-3

FSM-2 jumper J81: end switch “car door B open”

Setting J81
End switch in series with coil K8 1-2
Without end switch (coil K8 at +24 V) 2-3

Notice on the activation of the door relays/contactors!

Except for door drives for which switching off must occur by means of excess current or similar directly
at the contactor coil (OPEN/CLOSE), NEW LIFT recommends always connecting the door end switches
without switching off the coil voltage of door relays K2,K3,K7 and K8. Therefore, jumpers J21,J31,
J71 and J81 are to be plugged into 2-3. The OPEN/CLOSE relays of both doors are, thus, permanently
connected to 24VDC. PIN 1 is thereby active for the OPEN or CLOSE response from the respective door.
Prerequisite is that YES be set under Main Menu/Doors/Doors-Selective/Endswitches.

FSM-2 jumper J112: monitoring of car lightings

Setting J112
Internal voltage monitoring 1-2
External sensor 2-3

62 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FSM-2 jumpers JK1, JK2, JK3: assign car in group mode

If more than one FST controller is administered with a GST Group Controller, the respective car is assigned to
its FST controller with jumpers JK1, JK2 and JK3.
Car assignments of the FSM car top control module and the FPM car panel module of a car must be identical.

Setting JK1 JK2 JK3

FST A open open open
FST B plugged open open
FST C open plugged open
FST D plugged plugged open
FST E open open plugged
FST F plugged open plugged
FST G open plugged plugged
FST H plugged plugged plugged

Jumper JT: assignment of the car doors

Setting JT
Door A and/or door B open
Door C plugged

If there are three car doors, a separate car top control module is always required for door C.

4.3.3 LEDs
LED Colour State Description
LD1 Green On Nudging Door A
LD2 Green On Emergency call
LD3 Green On Close door A
LD4 Green On Car lighting on
LD5 Green On Open door A
LD6 Green On Car ventilator on
LD8 Green On Curve B
LD9 Green On +5 V power supply
LD10 Green On Curve A
LD11 Green On Nudging Door B
LD12 Green On Close door B
LD13 Green On Open door B

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 63

Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

4.3.4 Terminal strips and sockets

FSM-2 terminal strip X1

FSM-2: X1 Safety circuit without bypass 230 V

1 Switch 1
2 PE
3 Switch 1
4 Switch 2
5 PE
6 Switch 2
7 Switch 3
8 PE
9 Switch 3

FSM-2 terminal strip X2

FSM-2: X2 Safety circuit with bypass 230 V

1 Arrest switch
2 PE
3 Arrest switch
4 Switch 4
5 PE
6 Switch 4

FSM-2 terminal strip X3

FSM-2: X3 Safety circuit door contacts 230 V

1 Door contact of car door A
2 PE
3 Door contact of car door A
4 Door contact of car door B
5 PE
6 Door contact of car door B

FSM-2 terminal strip X4

FSM-2: X4 Outputs approach chime

1 +24 V
2 Approach chime UP
3 Approach chime DOWN
4 GND

FSM-2 terminal strip X5

FSM-2: X5 Inputs load measurement device

1 +24 V
2 Input empty load
3 Input full load
4 Input over load
5 GND

64 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FSM-2 terminal strip X6, X10

FSM-2: X6 Inputs car door A

1 +24 V
2 End switch door open
3 +24 V
4 End switch door closed
5 +24 V
6 Reversing contact door
7 +24 V
8 Light barrier door
9 GND

FSM-2 terminal strip X7, X9

FSM-2: X7 Outputs car door A

1 Relay K2, K3 common door signals
2 Relay K3 door signal open door
3 Relay K2 door signal close door
4 Relay K1 for push function / light curtain test NO
5 Relay K1 for push function / light curtain test NC
6 Relay K1 for push function / light curtain test COM

FSM-2 terminal strip X8

FSM-2: X8 Locking solenoids

1 Relay K5 curve door side A NC
2 Relay K5 curve door side A COM
3 Relay K5 curve door side A NO
4 Relay K4 curve door side B NC
5 Relay K4 curve door side B COM
6 Relay K4 curve door side B NO

FSM-2 terminal strip X11

FSM-2: X11 Car lighting sensor

1 +24 V
2 External sensor
3 + HSG
4 +8 V (max. 50mA)
5 GND

FSM-2 socket X12

FSM-2: X12 LON bus car

Pin 1 Bus signal A
Pin 2 Bus signal B
Pin 3 +24 V
Pin 4 GND

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 65

Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FSM-2 terminal strip X13

FSM-2: X13 Emergency call button / Emergency lighting

1 Emergency lighting +
2 Emergency lighting -
3 Emergency call button car NC
4 Emergency call button car COM

FSM-2 terminal strip X14

FSM-2: X14 Zone switch

1 +24 V resp. +HSG +12 V for A
2 Zone switch A
3 GND
4 +24 V for B
5 Zone switch B
6 GND

FSM-2 terminal strip X15

ATTENTION: Only use the terminal on X15 if the position encoder is connected in the shaft (jumpers
131, 133, 135 and 136 on 2-3 and FSM-2 X25 not used).

FSM-2: X15 Spare conductors LIK/USP

1 USP+R
2 USP-R
3 USP+T / TC
4 USP-T / BC

FSM-2 terminal strip X16

FSM-2: X16 Spare conductors for intercom

1 Speak D
2 Speak C
3 Speak B
4 Speak A

FSM-2 terminal strip X17

FSM-2: X17 Spare conductors LMS 24/7

1 Level switch -
2 Level switch +
3 Exchange line B
4 Exchange line A

FSM-2 terminal strip X18

FSM-2: X18 AC door 400V AC

1 PE
2 L3
3 L2
4 L1
5 N

66 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FSM-2 terminal strip X19

FSM-2: X19 Car lighting / ventilator

1 Relay K10 car lighting
2 PE
3 N car lighting
4 Relay K11 car ventilator
5 PE
6 N car lighting
7 L car lighting
8 PE
9 N car lighting

FSM-2 terminal strip X20

FSM-2: X20 Emergency call

1 Emergency call button under car
2 Emergency call button under car
3 Relay K9 emergency call forwarding COM
4 Relay K9 emergency call forwarding NC
5 Relay K9 emergency call forwarding NO

FSM-2 terminal strip X21

FSM-2: X21 Inspection control pod

1 Inspection control pod UP
2 Inspection control pod DOWN
3 Inspection control pod ON
4 Auxiliary mode control bridging function
5 With bypass safety circuit switches 1 - 3
6 Without bypass safety circuit switches 1 - 3
7 N socket control pod
8 PE
9 L socket control pod

FSM-2 terminal strip X22

FSM-2: X22 Inspection controller 24 V

1 +24 V
2 Inspection On
3 Inspection UP
4 Inspection DOWN
5 Inspection drive fast

FSM-2 socket X23

FSM-2: X23 Hand-held terminal

Pin1 Bus signal A
Pin 2 Bus signal B
Pin 3 +24 V
Pin 4 GND

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 67

Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FSM-2 terminal strip X24

FSM-2: X24 Spare inputs and outputs

1 GND
2 Programmable I/O port72
3 Programmable I/O port73
4 Programmable I/O port74
5 Programmable I/O port75
6 Programmable I/O port76
7 Programmable I/O port77
8 Programmable I/O port78
9 +24 V

FSM-2 socket X25

FSM-2: X25 Shaft positioning

1 GND
2 INK A+ / ABS CLK +
3 GND
4 INK B+ / ABS DATA +
5 GND
6 +24 V
7 INK A - / ABS CLK -
8 INK B - / ABS DATA -
9 +5 V

FSM-2 terminal strip X26

FSM-2: X26 Car top box

1 Emergency call button
2 Emergency call button
3 L shaft light button
4 L shaft light

FSM-2 terminal strip X27

FSM-2: X27 Inspection end switch

1 Inspection end switch UP
2 Inspection end switch UP
3 Inspection end switch DOWN
4 Inspection end switch DOWN
5 Foldaway railing contact
6 Foldaway railing contact
7 N safety circuit

FSM-2 socket X30

Identical in construction to FST X30 (see „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X30“ page 59).

68 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Car top control module FSM-2

FSM-2 terminal strip X31

FSM-2: X31 Travelling cable 400V AC FSM-2 terminal strip

1 N X18.5
2 L1 AC door X18.4
3 L2 AC door X18.3
4 L3 AC door X18.2
5 N car lighting X19.3
6 L car lighting X19.7
7 L shaft light button X26.3
8 L shaft light X26.4
9 PE X19.5

FSM-2 term100inal strip X32

FSM-2: X32 Travelling cable FSM-2 terminal strip

1 Car door side A X3.1
2 Car door side B X3.4
3 Car door side C X3.6
4 Car emergency stop X2.1
5 Bypass UP X27.1
6 Bypass DOWN X27.3
7 Bypass ON X27.5
8 Bypass X214.
9 N safety circuit X27.7

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 69

Technical data
LON bus

4.4 LON bus

The FST controller is connected to the FST components via the LON bus. The number of bus cables is depen-
dent on the number of electronic assemblies.
Unused bus inputs and outputs must be terminated with a terminator.

Make absolutely certain to ensure adequate strain relief of all bus cables on the FST controller!
All bus cables may only be plugged in and unplugged while in a power-free state!

4.4.1 Technical data

Description Value
Supply voltage 24 V DC ±10%
Weight 0.072 kg/m
Maximum cable length 1000 m
Temperature range: Storage & transport / operation -20 – +70 °C / ±0 – +60 °C
Relative humidity: Storage & transport / operation +5 – +95 % / +15 – +85 %
(non-condensing)

LON bus cable

heat-shrink sleeving color code

plug
terminator

Fig. 4.8: LON bus cable

Colour code of shrink tubing

Colour Bus cable length

bk 0.5 m
rd 1.0 m
wh 3.0 m
ye 5.0 m
bl 7.0 m
gn 10.0 m
bk 15.0 m
rd 20.0 m

Plug

X... Colour code LON bus plug

1 bk Bus signal "A"
2 wh Bus signal "B"
3 rd + 24 V / 4 A
4 pr 0V / GND

70 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Technical data
Flat travelling cable

4.5 Flat travelling cable

The FST controller is connected to the electronic assemblies on the car via the flat travelling cable. The power
supply for the car components and transmission of safety-relevant signals also take place via the flat travelling
cable.
All plugs of the travelling cable may only be plugged in and unplugged while in a power-free state!

4.5.1 Technical data

Description Value
Supply voltage 24 V DC ±10%
230 V AC ±10%
Weight 0.7 kg/m
Maximum free suspension height 50 m
Minimum bending radius (moveable) 0.5 m
Temperature range: Storage & transport / operation -30 – +70 °C / -15 – +70 °C
Relative humidity: Storage & transport / operation +5 – +95 % / +15 – +85 %
(non-condensing)

FSM-2 X31
connect to plastic bolts

FSM-2 X30

controller side FSM-2 X32

control cabinet socket X31

car side

connect to metal bolts (earth)

FST-2 X30 The ends of the travelling cable are identical.
Therefore it is not necessary to observe
orientation.
FST-2 X32

Fig. 4.9: Flat travelling cable

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 71

Technical data
Flat travelling cable

Travelling cable

Wire from FST Function to FSM

ID
1 X32.1 Car door side A X32.1
2 X32.2 Car door side B X32.2
3 X32.3 Car door side C X32.3
4 X32.4 Car emergency stop X32.4
5 X32.5 Bypass UP X32.5
6 X32.6 Bypass DOWN X32.6
7 X32.7 Bypass ON X32.7
8 X32.8 Bypass X32.8
9 X32.9 N safety circuit X32.9
10 X30.11 GND X30.11
11 X30.22 + 24 V X30.22
12 X30.10 + HSG X30.10
13 X30.13 EMERGENCY CALL X30.13
14 X30.1 +24 V X30.1
15 X30.12 GND X30.12
16 X31.1 N X31.1
17 X31.2 L1 X31.2
18 X31.3 L2 X31.3
19 X31.4 L3 X31.4
20 X31.5 N car lighting X31.5
21 X31.6 L car lighting X31.6
22 X31.7 L shaft light button X31.7
23 X31.8 L shaft light X31.8
yellow / green X31.9 PE X31.9
vi (S1) X30.21 Level Ref+ X30.21
tu (S1) X30.9 Level Ref- X30.9
wt (S1) X30.20 Telephone B X30.20
bl (S1) X30.8 Telephone A X30.8
vi (S2) X30.18 SPR-D X30.18
tu (S2) X30.6 SPR-C X30.6
wt (S2) X30.17 SPR-B X30.17
or (S2) X30.5 SPR-A X30.5
vi (S3) X30.16 SSI DATA+ X30.16
tu (S3) X30.4 SSI DATA- X30.4
wt (S3) X30.3 SSI CLK+ X30.2
gn (S3) X30.15 SSI CLK+ X30.15
vi (S4) X30.19 Door zone encoder B X30.19
tu (S4) X30.7 Door zone encoder A X30.7
wt (S4) X30.14 LON bus B X30.14
bn (S4) X30.2 LON bus A X30.2

S1 - S4 = each with four twisted wires with shielding

Colour codes acc. to IEC 60189-2

vi: violet tu: turquoise wt: white
bl: blue or: orange gn: green
bn: brown

72 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
General

5 Menu tree

5.1 General
The FST software is configured via the FST user interface or the HHT hand-held terminal with the help of the
FST menu. The FST menu is displayed in the menu tree.

Software version
The menu tree corresponds to that of software version V2.000.0138.

Executions
Following the depiction of the menu tree, all menu items are described together with their functions and setting
ranges.
Hidden menu items are marked with . These can be displayed with System / Factory Menu / Hidden
Menus.
For all menu items with adjustable numerical values, the value “0” corresponds to deactivation of the respective
function.

Optional
Configuration can be performed both directly on the FST or comfortably on a laptop using the FST Editor (via
serial interface or remote data transmission).

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 73

Menu tree
General

MAIN MENU

Service Error List

page 84 Clear Error List
Line3:Info-Display
Service-Counters Clear All Counters
Set Interval
Motor-Hours Since Day1
Since Clear
To Service
Interval

Drives Since Day1

Since Clear
To Service
Interval

Door Movements Since Day1

Since Clear
To Service
Interval

Change in dirs DC. Total

DC. Rope
Remaining
Interval

Statistic Reset
Fault Reporting
after Error: LED...

Drive Remote Drive Menu (only for frequency inverter with serial control or DCP-activation)
page 86 Start Monitoring
Drive Type
Brake Monitoring Enabled
Start Delay
Continuous
Input
Brake Delay
[Link] Max Time (only for controller type DCP 03)
Drive Speeds Possible
Enabled
Calibrated
Calib(top) 
        Motor Monitoring
Drive Monitoring
Motor Run-on
Re-levelling
Relevelling Delay
Relevelling Mon.
Drive Optimisation
Emerg. Stop:CarCall
Emerg. Stop:Hold
Homing Time
Contactor Monitor
Contactor Mon. Time
Start method (only for hydraulic installations)
Valve-Time (only for Start method = Soft-Star)
Star / Delta (only for Start method = Star / Delta
Anti-Creep Enable
on relevelling
Max. wait time
Off Delay

74 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
General

Drive [Link] Mon.

Down-Valve Shutoff
Pre-start weighing
Change Time
Stop Max
Pawl-control Function
HydrUnit
Raise Distance
Raise Time Max
Seating-Zone
Solenoid-Pawl
Pawl Time Max
Door-lock
Fine Pump-UP
Fine Pump-DN
Low Press. Ctrl.
Overload Ctrl.
Hydraulic clamping Re-levelling
Warm-up Drive
Quick Start
Quick Start Time 
Special Params Time-1
...Time-7
Switch-1
...Switch-6

Config. Installation Calibration Drive

page 90 page 90 Learn Drive
Set Floor [n]
Correct-Levels-COP
Correct-levelling
Cal. V-tolerance
Cal. Shaft Type 
Clear Calibration 
Safety Gear Floor
Safety Gear Offset
Installation Mode
Prio-Landing / Car Landing Prio. Type
page 90 Landing Prio. Time
Landing Prio. Prog
Car Prio. Typ
Keep landing calls
Car-Prio Auto-Hold
Car-Prio Call-Max
Bed-Lift Time
SuperPrio-Control
SuperPrio-Text
SuperPrio-Text

Park Drives Enabled

page 91 Program (0 ... 20)

Auto Test Drive Mode

page 91 Car-Calls
Landing-Cal
Doors
Floor-Limit
Lo-Limit
Hi-limit
Time-Limit
Interval

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 75

Menu tree
General

Config LON Configuration Search LON Modules

page 92 Show LON Modules
LON Edit Enable
CMM-generate list
CMM-activate
Modem/Fax/LMS LMS floor-locking
page 92 FST FAX Enable
Tel. Number FST
Modem Number 1
Modem Number 2
FAX Number 1
FAX Number 2
Dial Prefix
Modem InitString 1
Modem InitString 2
FAX InitString 1
FAX InitString 2
Dial Attempts FAX
Pause between Dial
Fax Numbers Used
FAX Auto Send
FAX Control
Send Test Fax

I/O Configuration I/O Ports (0...79) Raw Value

page 93 Debounce

I/O Flags (0 ... 15) Delay

Mask
Ctrl.
I/O Error (0 ... 255) ID
Info
Ctrl.
IP Configuration IP Enable
page 93 IP Address
Subnet mask
Default gateway
Server IP Address
Port Number
VNC Setting
IP CarCalls Lock Enabled
Enable Time
Non-Locked Flrs Side-A
Side-B
EAZ Configuration Use Text
page 94 EAZ Text Text (0 ... Max. floor)
Bottom Flr. Car
Bottom Flr. Hall
Target-Floor Car
LON-EAZ type
LON-EAZ Number
LON-EAZ Config.
LON-EAZ Download
IRT-code
Display Dimming
Free EAZ-256 Text
Chime Functions Chimes Enabled
page 95 Chime Duration
Chime Trigger
Chime when in flr
Car Chime
Landing Chimes

76 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
General

Config IDꞌs Lift ID-Number

page 95 Lift ID-Name
NEW-Factory No.
Lift Manufac. No.
Project-Code

Group Settings GST Menu (only with GST board; see GST manual)
page 95 Lift ID-Number
Group Member
Group Floor Offset
Flr Offset-Car
Flr Offset-Landing
ADM-Bus Mask-1
ADM-Bus Mask-2

Anti Nuisance Maximum Car Calls

page 96 Stops w/o Exit
Empty Car Sence
Weight / Car-Calls
Call Direction
always clear Up/Dn
Emergency-Call

Car Ventilator Control Mode

page 96 Vent. Off Delay
Output Inverted

Car Light Light-Off Delay

page 96 Light Monitoring
Evac. - Light Off

Car-Operate-Panel EAZ type

page 97 Lamp type
Display-0
Display-1
Display-2
OPEN = A+B
CLOSE = A+B
OPEN=last
Card Reader
-“- Clear Opt
Chime-Roof
Chime-Floor
DoorOpen NC
O-Load Blink
Pin-34 Functn
Xtra-Inputs
Click Off
Chk ack. lamps
2xCall=Clear
HEX+n Offset

Fireman Options Fire Standards

page 98 Fire->Fireman (ADM)
Fire->Fireman (I/O)
Only ADM->Fireman
Off only in M-Flr
Door Open in M-Flr
Fire Main Floor
Fire MainFlr Door

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 77

Menu tree
General

Config Fireman Options Smoke Evac. Plan

page 98 Smoke alerm-Prio
Smoke drive Thru
Fire sig. Pulsed
DeadMan-DoorClose
D0 allowed
Safety-Curtain
Fireman Mode Reset

Weight Sensor Sensor-Type

page 99 LCS Settings Threshold-Empty
Threshold-Full
Lift max. capacity
Ref. weight (L2)
Cal. Empty (L1)
Cal. Ref-weight (L2)
Correct Offset
Cal. L1/L2 from COP
Auto-Adjustment Chain Compensation
Flr-0:offset->0
Floor values Offset (kg)
Generate Table
Drift Compensation
Auto Zero<30kg
Options LCS-Reset

Digital Settings OverLd-FST Input

FullLd-FST Input
OverLd-FSM Input
FullLd-FSM Input
EmptyL-FSM Input

Analog Settings Level-Empty

Level-Full
Level-OverL
Speech Output Activated
page 101 Speech Module Type
SPK-Module Output-type
Speech-Codes (0 ... 255)

SAM Module Volume Chan.1

Volume Chan.2
Backgrnd Music
Debug-Mode
Only Disabled
Message repeat
“floor-X“ doorA
“floor-X“ doorB
“door open/cls“
“door nudging“
“up/down“-early
“up/down“-late
“overloaded“
“full load“
“out-of-Order“
“special-drive“
“evacuation“
“fire-recall“
“fireman srvc“
“lift-off“
“service mode“

78 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
General

Config Speech Output SAM Modul arrival gong

as UP/DOWN
“[Link]“
“Floor Locked“

Project-Config Basis Basis (0-9)

(only if / ID / project code > 0000) LON-Modules LON-Modules (0-30)

Hall Stations Landing Call Enabl

page 102 ADM-EAZ Coding
Special Display 0
Special Display 1

Lift-Off Lift-Off Program

page 103 Lift-Off Floor
Lift-Off Doors
Pseudo-Flr. Park

Special Functions Loading Function Program Nr.

page 103 Options (only if program Nr.=3)
Load Time-max
[Link]
LPrio-Prec.

Lobby-Stop Enable
Floor
Doors
Control

Remote Entry Enabled

Automatic-Call
Maximum Wait
Must be Empty
ADR ack. lamp
Immedt. collect
Immedt. target
No Enable-2
Targ. Locking

Bank-Control Enabled
Use Empty Car Mon.
Bank Control
User-Group Masks A
B
[Link]

Ramp-Drive StartFloor
Control
Hi-Limit
Lo-Limit
Pre-Limit

[Link]-Security Enable
Max. Wait Car
Max. Wait Landing
Floor-Masks Mask

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 79

Menu tree
General

Config Inspection Door Test

page 106 I/P Inverted
Start Delay UP
Start Delay DN

Evacuation [Link] Zone

Start Delay Speed Max.
Ext. Evac. Floor  Speed Limit
Temperature Levels Lev-1: Turn Fan On Time Limit
Lev-2: Stop Lift

ESM-Settings Enable
Mo-Fr Start
Blinking Approach Mo-Fr End
Car Call Priority Sa-Su Start
Departure Arrows Sa-Su End
[Link] Max Sleep delay
DoorC=Emerg-EndSw. Warmup time
[Link] Warmup Text
w. open doors
Buffer-Park (hydraulic installations only)
B-Park Pump (hydraulic installations only)
B-Park Run-on (hydraulic installations only)

Positioning Floor Position ABS (0 ... max floor)

page 114 Position REL (0 ... max floor)
Level UP (0 ... max floor)
Level DOWN (0 ... max floor)
Zone Sw. UP (0 ... max floor)
Zone Sw. DOW (0 ... max floor)

Landing Landing UP (V1...V8)

Landing DOWN (V1...V8)

Global Resolutn.
Direction
Encoder
[Link]
Crawl Dist
[Link] Mon.
Enc.B. Ref 
Inspectn.-Fast
Inspection-UP
Inspection-Dn
Lock Position
ZoneB Output
ZoneB [Link].
[Link]
UCM-A3 Zone
Encoder 
Miscel-D1 
Miscel-D2 
Relevelling Limits Limit UP ON
Limit UP OFF
Limit DN ON
Limit DN OFF
Limit DEEP

80 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
General

Positioning Cal-Results UP-Speed (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)

UP-Accel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
UP-Decel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
UP-t_Accel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
UP-t_Decel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
DOWN-Speed (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
DOWN-Accel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
DOWN-Decel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
DOWN-t_Accel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
DOWN-t_Decel. (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
V80%-SpeedMon (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)
V80%-Distance (V1...V8, Ve, Vi)

Pseudo Floors Pos. (Rel.) (0 ...7)

Shaft-Markers Pos. (Rel.)

[Link]. Control
Auto-Orien.
Orien delay
[Link]
[Link]
ZoneB-Length
ZoneB-Hysters
ZoneB-Input
ZoneB-Debnce
BOBU-Runoff
KO/KU-Input
Gray LO-floor
Gray HI-floor

Calls Call Floor Config (0 ... Max Floor)

page 121 Program (0 ... Max Floor)
Door (0 ... Max Floor)
Special Call Mode
Lift-Boy Mode
Power Fail Restore

System Time-Date Clock Setting

page 123 Date Setting
Daylight Saving

Password Setting Level: high

Level: middle
Level: low

Language
Recorder Recorder RESTART
Recorder STOP
Recorder CONTINUE
Filter Setting Detail
Weight Measures
Statistics
Group Statistic
Drive Curve
RIO traffic
Remote Activity
Stop-when-full

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 81

Menu tree
General

System Update FST Upd. f. USBStick

page 123 Update LON-Modules Upd. f. USBStick
Upd. f. Intern
Update EAZ-Progrm 
Config--> Backup
Config<-- Backup
Copy MicroSD--> Cfg Qwn SerNo.
Copy To Config -> USBStick
Record -> USBStick
S/W -> USBStick
Error List -> USB
Copy From USBStick ->Config
Format Clear USBStick

Factory Menu Hidden Menus

page 124 DCC:Allow Clr/Set 
Srvc Counter Reset 
Cfg-Strings Reset 
I/O-Config Reset 
                    Settings ASAUS Protect 
Targ-Retry Inh 
DRM-Reset 
FSTAT2-Delta 
Miscel-1 ... 
...Miscel-16 
EmergStop-Time 
DRM-Period 
DRM-Distance 
V-Bypass Max 
                                V-Inspect. Max 
V-AuxiliaryMax. 
[Link] 
[Link] Zone 
DeenergizeTime 
Photocell Max. 
Ser. X9 Baud 
                                  Prod. Test Mode 
                              Time Sync. Master 

                        EN 81 Options UCM-A3    Enabled 

                                               A3-Drive 
                                               Err-Hydraulic 
Err=No Inspect 
                                                Test with Spd. 
                                              Test w/o Ass      

DRM-Program1     EN 81-20    Insp-Fast Ctrl 

DRM-Program2              No Rem. Access 
 

DRM-Program3              Bypass FSM-K4   

Clone FST-2 LON               Test Photocell 

Clone FST-2 SERIAL           PC PowerFSM-K5 
Keypad auto-lock             Hydr. Turn-stop 
                                               Test Door Scct  
                                               Glass Door Mon 
                                               [Link] ADM          
Panel Test
Guide Settings Help waittime
FST Reset! NBM Display

82 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
General

Doors Doors-Basic Number Doors

page 128 Apply-ALL
Cam Delay
Cam Time Max
Lock Delay
Lock Fail Max
Lock Fail Open
SCCT Debounce
Retry Time
Open Delay
PreClose Delay
PreClose O/P
[Link]=OFF
Bypass t_OFF
Bypass t_ON
Pre-Opening
Fast-Closure
Prio-DC
Nudging Output
Nudge-WarnOnly
I /P Photocell
I /P Reverse. Sw
Allow DRM-Door
SS-Curtain
SS-CurtainWait
SS-Curtain A+B
WheelchairTime
Selective-Cams
Door-Lock Type
Door-Lock Del.

Doors Doors-Selective Type

Opening Time
Decoupling
Decouple Max.
Manual Door
-“- debounce
Endswitches
Open Hold Tim
Reversing Tim
Deenergize
Change Delay
Nudge Time 
[Link] Land 
[Link] Car 

GST Menu see manual GST

Lock Menu

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 83

Menu tree
General

TEST MENU page 133

Fault Reset
Doors-LOCK
Test Drive ON
Auto Test Drv ON/OFF
Service Mode ON/OFF
Endswitch Test Top
Endswitch Test Bot
V-Mon. Test Top
V-Mon. Test Bot.
DRM Test
Buffer Test Up
Buffer Test Down
UCM-A3 Test Up
UCM-A3 Test Down
UCM-A3 Test Act.
UCM-A3 Fault Reset
Brake Measurmt. ON/OFF
Safety Gear Autom.
Safety Gear Manual
Safety Gear Reset

84 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Lock Menu

5.2 MAIN MENU - Lock Menu

Menu item Description Setting range
Lock Menu Closing the main menu: YES
The main menu can only be opened again with the password NO
for the corresponding security level.

The FST controller is password protected to prevent unauthorised manipulation of control parameters and
endangerment of persons or impairment of the lift system resulting from unauthorised manipulation. Three secu-
rity levels are available for commissioning, customer service and maintenance.

Security levels

Level Access Activity

HIGH Unlimited Commissioning
MEDIUM Limited Customer service
LOW Non-editable menus Maintenance

The password of the FST controller has four digits. The password is set to “0000” on delivery.

Setting the password

►►Select MAIN MENU / System / Password Setting.
►►Select LEVEL 1 with E.
►►Set password for level 1 with ¢ £.
►►Confirm password with E.
►►Exit menu and save settings with ¥.
Repeat the above steps for levels 2 and 3.

Locking the main menu

The main menu is not automatically locked when a password is defined; rather, it must be locked separately
after a password has been defined.
►►Select MAIN MENU / Lock Menu.
►►Activate password settings with E.
►►Exit menu and save settings with ¥.
The password must be entered the next time you change from the main screen to the main menu.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 85

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Service

5.3 MAIN MENU - Service

Menu item Description Setting range
Error list Display of the last 100 error messages (see „FST-2XT and FST-
2XTs terminal strip X13“ page 56).
Clear Error List Clear entries in the error list YES
NO
Line 3: Info-Display Switches the display of line C from status messages to diag-
nostic messages
Service-Counters - The controller has three internal service counters for drives, YES
  Clear All Counters motor hours and door movements. A service interval can be NO
assigned to each counter after which a programmable I/O port
signals that maintenance is due
The current counter values for motor hours, drives
and door movements can be reset here (e.g., following
maintenance).
Service-Counters - Overwrite counter values with a new interval (e.g., following YES
  Set Interval maintenance). NO
Service-Counters - Motor hours since commissioning of the FST controller; value Read only
  Motor-Hours - cannot be reset.
  Since Day1
Service-Counters - Motor hours since the last Clear All Counters Read only
  Motor-Hours -
  Since Clear
Service-Counters - Motor hours remaining until the next maintenance Read only
  Motor-Hours -
   To Service
Service-Counters - Motor hours of the maintenance interval 0 ... 9999 h
  Motor-Hours -
  Interval
Service-Counters - Drives since commissioning of the FST controller; value cannot Read only
  Drives - be reset.
  Since Day1
Service-Counters - Drives since the last Clear All Counters Read only
  Drives -
  Since Clear
Service-Counters - Drives remaining until the next maintenance Read only
  Drives -
   To Service
Service-Counters - Drives of the maintenance interval 0 ... 99999
  Drives -
 Interval
Service-Counters - Door movements since commissioning of the FST controller; Read only
  Door Movements - value cannot be reset.
  Since Day1
Service-Counters - Door movements since the last Clear All Counters Read only
  Door Movements -
  Since Clear
Service-Counters - Door movements remaining until the next maintenance Read only
  Door Movements -
  To Service
Service-Counters - Door movements of the maintenance interval. Read only
  Door Movements -
 Interval
Service-Counters - Number of drive direction changes of the car since the FST Read only
  Change in dirs - controller was commissioned.
  DC. Total
Service-Counters - Number of drive direction changes of the car since the last Read only
  Change in dirs - Clear All Counters
  DC. Rope

86 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Service

Menu item Description Setting range

Service-Counters - Remaining drive direction changes of the car until it is necessary Read only
  Change in dirs - to replace the means of suspension. The "CABLES!" message
 Remaining alternating with time is less than 100000 or less than 10% of the
interval.
Service-Counter - Interval that is to be defined at which the means of suspension 0 ... 99999
  Change in dirs - are to be replaced.
 Interval
Statistic Reset Reset FST-internal drive and call statistics YES
NO
Fault Reporting Enable output of error messages (programmable inputs/outputs, ON
modem, PAM, fax) OFF
after Error: LED... Function of the error LED on the FST circuit board after adding a BLINKS
new entry to the error list REMAINS OFF

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 87

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Drive

5.4 MAIN MENU - Drive

Menu item Description Setting range
Remote Drive Menu If a corresponding drive is connected (e.g., DCP), the Remote
Drive Menu is available. To access or exit the Remote Drive
Menu, press D.
Start Monitoring Maximum time permitted between pre-selection of the drive and 0 ... 30 s
leaving the level position. If the car does not leave the level posi-
tion within the set time, the installation is shut down with DRM-
START PROBLEM (see „8.1 Error messages“ page 161).
Drive Type Drive type used. Select from a list of all common drive types.
Brake Monitoring Monitoring of the drive brake (brake bleed contact) at FST X1.19, YES
 Enabled .20. When starting, input FST X1.19, .20 must be activated NO
during the set Brake Delay (+24 V). When stopping, the input
must be deactivated during the set Brake Delay. If this fails, the
system is shut down with DRM-BRAKE FAILURE (see „8.1 Error
messages“ page 161).
Brake Monitoring Time between drive start and start of brake monitoring 1000 ...
  Start Delay 9999 ms
Brake Monitoring Brake is monitored continuously after the brake monitoring delay YES
 Continuous elapses (default: one-time check). NO
Brake Monitoring Brake monitoring contact as normally closed contact instead of NC,NO,NC+NO
 Input normally open contact
Brake Delay Maximum time permitted between activation of the drive brake 0 ... 9999 ms
and confirmation from the brake bleed contact at terminal FST
X1.19, .20. (see Brake Monitoring).
[Link] Max Time Maximum time that the auxiliary brakes may be opened prior to 0...2999 ms
start.
Drive Speeds Possible drive speeds V8...V1 of the set drive type ("1" means Read only
 Possible speed is possible).
Drive Speeds Enabled drive speeds V8...V1 of the set drive type ("1" means 00000000 ...
 Enabled speed enabled). Only speeds that are displayed with "1" under 11111111
Possible can be enabled!
Drive Speeds Overview of the drive speeds V8...V1 successfully measured 00000000 ...
 Calibrated during the calibration drive (1: speed calibrated). 11111111
After a successful calibration drive, all speeds displayed with "1"
under Enabled must also be displayed with "1" under Calibrated!
The parameters should only be manually changed in exceptional
cases. This is only possible if hidden menus are displayed.
Drive Speeds After a successful calibration drive, approach speed Ve must be 00000000 ...
 Calib(top)  displayed with bit pattern 00000001. 11111111
Motor Monitoring Monitoring of the motor temperature on FST X1.22. If the terminal YES
is activated (+24 V), the installation is shut down with DRM- NO
MOTOR FAILURE (see „8.1 Error messages“ page 161).
Drive Monitoring Activation of drive monitoring on terminal X1.21 of the FST. For YES
evaluating a fault alarm contact from the drive, e.g., inverter. If NO
24VDC is not applied at the terminal, the DRM DRIVE ERROR
error message is output.
Motor Run-on Run-on time of the drive after the level position has been 0 ... 2 s
reached. Only required for improving the performance of unregu-
lated drives.
Re-levelling Relevelling with open shaft and car doors. YES
NO
Relevelling Delay Delay between recognising that the car is not levelled and the 0 ... 9999 ms
start of relevelling. This parameter ensures smooth relevelling for
swaying cars.
Relevelling Mon. 10 re-levellings must be performed in the maximum allowed time, 0…255
otherwise the car is brought to a standstil on the highest floor
with the error message DRM Re-levelling monitoring

88 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Drive

Menu item Description Setting range

Drive Optimisation If the drive is equipped with a drive optimisation function, this YES
parameter can be activated to optimise floor-to-floor drives (see NO
„5.4.1 Drive optimisation“ page 91).
[Link]:CarCall Handling of pending car calls after a safety circuit interruption in KEEP CAR
the emergency-stop area (before FST X14.6 / .7) while the car is CALLS
moving. CLEAR CAR
CALLS
[Link]:Hold Handling of landing call enabling after a safety circuit interruption YES
in the emergency-stop area (before FST X14.6 / .7) while the car NO
is moving.
››YES: landing calls are blocked; car can only be put back into
operation by means of a car call
››NO: pending landing calls are cleared and re-enabled after the
safety circuit is closed
Only if emergency stop: car calls = CLEAR car calls
Homing Time Period of time without a drive command before a hydraulic lift 0 ... 15 min
automatically moves to the bottom floor.
Contactor Monitor Monitoring of the main contactors on FST X1.23 via auxiliary YES
contacts (NC contacts). When stopping, input FST X1.23 must be NO
deactivated within the contactor monitoring time (+ 24 V). If this
fails, the installation is shut down with DRM CONTACTOR MONIT.
(see „8.1 Error messages“ page 161)).
Contactor [Link] Time between stopping and triggering of contactor monitoring. 0 ... 9999 ms
Start method Hydraulic start methods STAR/DELTA
SOFT-START
Valve-Time Is displayed if Soft-Start was selected as start method. 0 - 5.0 s
Duration of the soft-start
Star / Delta Is displayed if Star/Delta was selected as the start method. 0 - 5.0 s
Length of time between star and delta application
Anti-Creep Function Anti-Creep OFF/ON YES
Enable Programming of I/O NO
Output 00006F84 and input 000043F2 are required
Anti-Creep Activation of the Anti-Creep output during relevelling YES
on relevelling NO
Anti-Creep The monitoring time during „activation“ and „deactivation“ of 0000 - 4000 ms
[Link] time magnet.
Error type-1: the pre-start test, input in the standby state is YES
incorrect. NO
Error type-2: during activation, input signal did not switch in the
required time.
Error type-3: during deactivation, input signal did not switch in the
required time.
Anti-Creep Off Delay of the Anti-Creep magnet 0000 - 4000 ms
Off Delay
[Link] Mon. Monitoring of the deceleration in the end floors. YES
NO
Down-Valve Shutoff Only for hydraulic drives: 0 - 2999 ms
Delay between anti creep protection and drive start.
Pre-start weighing Only for hydraulic systems. 0-4999 ms
Parameter changes the time between the opening of the shut-off
valve and the start of the drive to measure the load of the car. In
the event of an overload, the status is held until the light curtain is
interrupted.
Change Time Minimum lag time when changing the main contactors (fast to 0 ... 0.5 s
slow) of unregulated cable lifts.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 89

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Drive

Menu item Description Setting range

Stop Max Maximum permitted number of door contact or blocking agent 0 ... 10
interruptions (FST X14.5, .4, .3, .2) during a drive before all calls
are cleared (see „8.1 Error messages“ page 161)(OPEN DOOR
LOCK). The installation is not shut down; it only waits for new
drive calls.
Pawl-control Switches on the activation of a pawl-control for hydraulic freight OFF / ON /
 Function lifts. Activation of the pawl-control requires additional modules OPTIMISED
(see System description – Pawl-control).
Optimised: lift passes the target floor before it lowers onto the
pawls.
Pawl-control Hydraulic unit (see System description – Pawl-control) GIEHL
 HydrUnit [Link]
OILDYNAM
LEISTRITZ
Pawl-control Raise distance for retracting/extending the pawl-control (see 0 ... 255 mm
  Raise Distance System description – Pawl-control)
Pawl-control Maximum permitted raise time (see System description 0 ... 255 s
  Raise Time Max – Pawl-control)
Pawl-control Position range in which the lift must be located in order to be 0 ... 30 mm
 Seating-Zone detected as "seated". (in addition to the "seated" hardware (0 no function)
signal)
Pawl-control Switch on the electrical pawl-control with YES (pawl-control is YES
 Solenoid-Pawl always active in the extended state), switch on the hydraulic NO
pawl-control with NO (the motor switches off as soon as the end
position is reached).
Pawl-control Maximum length of time for retracting or extending the pawl. 0 - 15 s
  Pawl Time Max
Pawl-control Lock the car doors as long as no "seated" signal is output. (see YES
 Door-lock System description – Pawl-control) NO
Pawl-control Additional pump for activating raising (see System description YES
  Fine Pump-UP – Pawl-control) NO
Pawl-control Additional valve for activating lowering (see System description YES
  Fine Pump-DN – Pawl-control) NO
Pawl-control Re-pressurise to prevent slack rope while car is seated. YES
  Low [Link] NO
Pawl-control Activate overload measurement by briefly raising the car. 0 ... 255 s
  Overload Ctrl.
Pawl-control Option for activating of re-levelling during active pawl-control for YES
  Re-levelling all hydraulic drive types (available for drive type 4-valve hydr. + NO
ASV). Note: the main setting \Drive\Re-levelling continues to be
observed independent of it and must be additionally activated, if
ASV re-levelling is necessary.
Hydraulic clamping Activation of monitoring- and drive-specific processes (DCP03 YES
and Beringer ELRV only) when using an anti creep device. NO
Warm-up Drive Automatically triggered warm-up drive to the top floor. The func- 0 ... 9999 min
tion prevents cooling of the hydraulic oil. The timer starts after the 0=no function
homing drive is completed.
Quick Start With activated Quick Start, the drive is energised upon closing YES
of the car door, allowing start up to take place more quickly. NO
Additional switches and signals are required. Currently only for
DCP drive.
Quick Start Time  This function simulates the quick start switch on the car should it 0000 ...
not be possible to mount the switch mechanically. 5000 ms
The measured time corresponds to the time after leaving the
open holding position.
Special Params - Special parameters for drive-specific programming. Only change 0 ... 65535 ms
 Time-1 this value after consulting NEW LIFT!
... Time-7

90 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Drive

Menu item Description Setting range

Special Params - Special parameters for drive-specific programming. Only change ON OFF
 Switch-1 this value after consulting NEW LIFT!
... Switch-6

5.4.1 Drive optimisation

After a successful calibration drive, the FST controller knows the acceleration and deceleration characteristics
for each drive speed of the drive. It is thereby able to select the optimum drive speed for the distance that is to
be covered prior to each drive.
The Drive Optimisation parameter can be used to define whether the maximum selected drive speed must be
reached during each drive (drive distance > acceleration distance + braking distance + crawl distance) or whe-
ther the drive is equipped with a drive optimisation function that optimises the drive curve without reaching the
maximum speed (drive distance > deceleration distance + crawl distance).

Example: drive from floor A to floor B (floor distance = 2.6m)

››Nominal speed V2: braking distance= 2 m, acceleration distance = 2m
››Intermediate speed. V1: braking distance = 1 m, acceleration distance = 1m
››Crawl distance = 0.05m
››Safety clearance = 0.1m

Drive from A to B without drive optimisation:

Speed V2 is selected because 2.6m > 1m + 1m + 0.05m + 0.1m

Drive from A to B with drive optimisation:

Speed V3 is selected because 2.6m > 2 m + 0.05m + 0.1m

V2-drive - upward without drive V3-drive - upward with drive optimisation

optimisation s1: acceleration distance
V3
Positioning / Cal-Results / [V2] / UP -Accel.

s2: deceleration distance

Positioning / Landing / [V2] / Landing-UP
V2
s3: crawl distance
Positioning / Global / Crawl Distance +

s4: braking distance

Positioning / Floor[B] / LEVEL UP

s1 s2 s3 s4 s2 s3 s4
A Approach B A Approach B

Fig. 5.1: Drive from A to B without and with drive optimisation

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 91

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

5.5 MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range
Installation - Carrying out calibration drive. YES
  Calibration Drive During the calibration drive, four measurement drives are NO
performed per drive speed to automatically determine the exact
acceleration and braking behaviour of the respective speed. The
controller uses this information to select the optimum drive speed
and the exact braking point during each drive.
Installation - Carrying out learn drive. YES
  Learn Drive During the learn drive, the car automatically travels once through NO
the entire shaft (from bottom to top) at inspection speed. During
this process, the controller determines the exact position of the
magnets for the "Zone B", "[Link]" and "[Link]" magnet
switches. The level positions of the floors are automatically
centred in the door zones after the learn drive! The learn drive is
only required when using incremental positioning.
Installation - The current position of the car is entered as reference point for from 0 to the top
 Set Floor [n] the entire shaft. The level positions of the remaining floors are floor
adjusted to the current position of the car.
Installation - Correction of the level position in the car directly via the car ON
  Correct-Levels-COP operating panel. With this type of level adjustment, the measured OFF
value is entered with the help of the buttons on the car operating
panel and a NEW LIFT position indicator. For detailed instruc-
tions, see FST Installation and Commissioning manual.
Installation - Correction of the level position on the floor on which the car is -250 ... 250 mm
 Correct-levelling currently located. The measured value must be entered (car is
too high: + sign; car is too low: - sign).
Installation - Measuring tolerance during the speed measurement of the 1 ... 100 %
  Cal. V-tolerance calibration drive. The set value should only be changed after
consulting NEW LIFT since the calibration results are influenced
by the measuring tolerance. Standard: 2%
Installation - Shaft size for automatic calibration drive: 0 ... 4
  Cal. Shaft Type  0 = automatic selection by FST (standard setting)
1 = large shaft size (no positioning drive)
2 = medium shaft size (several positioning drives)
3 = small shaft size (many positioning drives)
4 = x-small shaft size (quick calibration)
Menu item is not normally visible; enable with the "Hidden Menus
= YES" menu item
Installation - The state calibrated is canceled. If miscel 16 xxxxx1xxx is set, YES
  Clear Calibration  no normal drives are possible until a new calibration has been NO
carried out.
Installation - Position-dependent arrest triggering with corresponding I/O port 0 ... 63
  Safety Gear Floor relay circuit.
Define a floor in which arresting is to be triggered.
Installation - Because a stop delay can be expected during the arrest test, this 0 ... 9999 mm
  Safety Gear Offset parameter can be used to specify an offset in mm to compensate
for the stop delay and ensure uncomplicated removal of the test
weights.
Installation - Suppresses error messages that would prevent installation ON
  Installation Mode drives with a controller that has not yet been fully commissioned. OFF
Enables installation drives using the inspection and auxiliary
mode controls without connected encoder and car top control
module.
Prio-Landing / Car - Activation type "landing priority". Hard
  Landing Prio. Type -Hard: all car and landing calls are cleared Soft
- Soft: car calls remain, landing calls are cleared
Prio-Landing / Car - Delay for switching off "landing priority" after reaching the target 0 ... 999 sec
  Landing Prio. Time floor

92 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Prio-Landing / Car - Variations of "landing priority": Auto 1
  Landing Prio. Prog ››Auto 1: after reaching the target floor, the "landing priority" state Auto 2
remains active until the next car call Standard
››Auto 2: after reaching the target floor, "car priority" is activated
automatically
››Standard: after reaching the target floor and after the landing
priority time has elapsed, the installation switches to normal
operation
Prio-Landing / Car - Activation type "car priority". Hard
  Car Prio. Typ ››Hard: all car and landing calls are cleared Soft
››Soft: car calls remain, landing calls are cleared if Keep
landing calls = NO is set
Prio-Landing / Car - After activating "soft" car priority, the landing calls are also YES
  Keep landing calls retained NO
Prio-Landing / Car - Car is available for further drives with the car priority mode
  Car-Prio Auto-Hold during the specified time.
Prio-Landing / Car - Maximum calls during Prio-Landing/Car
  Car-Prio Call-Max
Prio-Landing / Car - Landing Prio. Prog / Auto 2 needs to be activated 0 … 255 sec
  Bed-Lift Time If a car call is triggered, the doors remain open until the Bed-Lift
Time has expired or by actuating the door closing button. Pres- Landing Prio.
sing the door opening button the Bed-Lift Time will start again. Prog
Prio-Landing / Car - Display location and display of the SuperPrio-Text with EAZ-256: 00000000 ...
  SuperPrio-Control Bit0 (00000001): display scrolling text on landing EAZ-256 00000111
Bit1 (00000010): reduce scrolling text to half of the display height
Bit2 (00000100): display scrolling text on EAZ-256 in the car
Prio-Landing / Car - Scrolling text to be displayed with SuperPrio in EAZ-256. The 20 ASCII
 SuperPrio-Text scrolling text may contain up to 20 ASCII characters. characters
Prio-Landing / Car - Scrolling text to be displayed with SuperPrio in EAZ-256. The 20 ASCII
 SuperPrio-Text scrolling text may contain up to 20 ASCII characters. characters
Park Drives - Enable park drive programs. YES
 Enable NO
Park Drives - Park drive characteristics of the lift system (see „5.5.1 Park drive
 Program programs“ page 109).
Auto Test Drive - Automatic call generation for testing purposes. Drive characteris- Sequence
 Mode tics of the auto test drive: Shuttle
››Sequence: floors are approached sequentially Random
(0,1,2,3,2,1,0,1,...)
›› Shuttle: car shuttles between "Lo-Limit" and "Hi-Limit"
›› Random: floors are approached in a random sequence
Auto Test Drive - Automatically generated car calls during the auto test drive YES
 Car-Calls NO
Auto Test Drive - Automatically generated landing calls during the auto test drive YES
 Landing-Cal NO
Auto Test Drive - Enable the car doors during the auto test drive; the set value 0 ... 7
 Doors corresponds to the following bit mask:
0 = no door enabled
1 = door A enabled
2 = door B enabled
3 = doors A and B enabled
Door: "1" = enabled 4 = door C enabled
5 = doors A and C enabled
Digit: bit 0-3 6 = doors B and C enabled
7 = all doors enabled

Auto Test Drive - When activated, only floors between Lo-Limit and Hi-Limit are YES
 Floor-Limit approached. NO
Note: Lo-Limit < Hi-Limit
Auto Test Drive - Bottom floor of the auto test drive 0 ... next to last
 Lo-Limit floor (top)

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 93

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Auto Test Drive - Top floor of the auto test drive 1 ... top floor
 Hi-Limit
Auto Test Drive - Auto test drive is automatically deactivated after two hours. YES
 Time-Limit NO
Auto Test Drive - Time between two calls of the auto test drive. 0 ... 255 s
 Interval
LON Configuration Perform a bus scan to determine which modules are connected YES
  Search LON Modules to the bus. All LON modules connected to the bus are entered in NO
a table (Show LON Modules).
LON Configuration Display all LON modules connected to the bus. The list of Read only with
  Show LON Modules LON modules is generated or updated with the Search LON LON Edit
Modules menu item. (see „5.5.2 Show LON modules“ page Enable = NO
110).
LON Configuration Enable editing mode for the LON modules. In editing mode, the YES
  LON Edit Enable properties of certain LON modules can be changed by changing NO
the number codes in "Show LON Modules" (see System descrip-
tion - LON Byte Editor)
LON Configuration Generate the list of LON modules with critical input functions YES
  CMM-generate list (CMM modules). NO
LON Configuration Activates CMM YES
 CMM-activate NO
Modem / Fax / LMS Permit external floor locking via remote data transmission (LMS YES
  LMS floor-locking lift monitoring system). NO
See Installation and Commissioning manual - fax modem!
Modem / Fax / LMS Enable all fax functions. OFF
  FST FAX Enable ON
Modem / Fax / LMS Telephone number of the FST modem. ASCII
  Tel. Number FST
Modem / Fax / LMS First telephone number for a modem connection ASCII
  Modem Number 1
Modem / Fax / LMS Second telephone number for a modem connection. ASCII
  Modem Number 2
Modem / Fax / LMS First telephone number for a fax connection. ASCII
  Fax Number 1
Modem / Fax / LMS Second telephone number for a fax connection. ASCII
  FAX Number 2
Modem / Fax / LMS Type of telephone network Tone-dial
  Dial Prefix Pulse-dial
ISDN
Modem / Fax / LMS Initialisation of the first modem, ASCII string according to modem ASCII
  Modem InitString 1 documentation.
Modem / Fax / LMS Initialisation of the second modem, ASCII string according to ASCII
  Modem InitString 2 modem documentation.
Modem / Fax / LMS Initialisation of the first fax, ASCII string according to modem ASCII
  Fax InitString 1 documentation.
Modem / Fax / LMS Initialisation of the second fax, ASCII string according to modem ASCII
  Fax InitString 2 documentation.
Modem / Fax / LMS Dial attempts for establishing a fax connection. 0 ... 10
  Dial Attempts FAX
Modem / Fax / LMS Pause between dial attempts. 0 ... 1000 s
  Pause between Dial
Modem / Fax / LMS Enable fax numbers. 0 ... 2
  Fax Numbers Used
Modem / Fax / LMS Time between two automatic fax reports. OFF
  FaX Auto Send EVERY HOUR
EVERY DAY
EVERY WEEK
EVERY MONTH

94 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Modem / Fax / LMS ››00000000 00000001 - fax type (in modem) 0000000000000
  FaX Control 0:CLASS-2 1=CLASS-2.0 ...
››00000000 00100000 - GSM fax device 1111111111111
››00000000 01000000 - send SMS instead of fax
››00000000 10000000 - diagnostics mode
››00000nnn 00000000 - fax-modem type
000: standard, 001: US-Robotics, 010...111: reserved
››00000000 00010000 (groups only)
1: send own fax, 0: send fax via GST
Modem / Fax / LMS A test fax is sent. YES
  Send Test Fax NO
I/O Configuration - Configure programmable I/O ports 00000000 ...
  I/O Ports - (see „6 Programmable I/O ports“ page 137) 11111111
  RAW Value
I/O Configuration - Delay of the I/O ports 0,0s … 25,5s
  I/O Ports -
 Debounce
I/O Configuration - Delay of the I/O ports. Depending on bit 1 of the CTRL. menu 00000000 ...
  I/O Flags - item, seconds or switching operations are to be set in the FFFFFFFF
 Delay settings area.
I/O Configuration - System conditions in which an I/O port switches to active. 00000000 ...
  I/O Flags - FFFFFFFF
 Mask
I/O Configuration - Flag check 00 ... FF
  I/O Flags -
 Ctrl.
I/O Configuration - Error type for activating the error output No error....A3
  I/O Error - actuator test
 ID
I/O Configuration - Additional filter for I/O error 000...255
  I/O Error -
 Info
I/O Configuration - Configuration of the error output 00 ... FF
  I/O Error -
 Ctrl.
IP Configuration - Activation of the onboard PAM function; activation only after
  IP Enable consulting with NEW LIFT
IP Configuration - Network address (IP) of the FST controller [Link]
  IP Address
IP Configuration - Network mask of FST controller [Link].
  Subnet mask
IP Configuration - Network address of the transfer point, e.g., router, etc.
  Default gateway
IP Configuration - Network address (IP) of the LMS-Elevision Server
  Server IP Address
IP Configuration - Port number of the LMS-Elevision Server 8001
  Port Number
IP Configuration - Device ID of the FST controller in BACnet 1000
  VNC Setting
IP Configuration - This parameter activates a serial connection to a security system YES
  IP CarCalls Lock PC to give access to a car button commandos, for example via NO
Enabled admission card.
The connection is possible only via Ethernet in XML format.
Standard setting is NO. Before activating this function consult
NEW LIFT Service line.
IP Configuration - During release time a car button commando could be released, 2-120 sec
  IP CarCalls Lock until the locking is active again.
Enable Time Standard setting is 4 sec.
For floors 0-7 [0]

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 95

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

IP Configuration - For floors 8-15 [1] 0-7
  IP CarCalls Lock For floors 16-23 [2]
Non-Locked Fils For floors 24-31 [3]
For floors 32-39 [4]
For floors 40-47 [5]
For floors 48-55 [6]
IP Configuration - For floors 56-63 [7] 00000000
  IP CarCalls Lock Definition of the door side A (binary) that is not locked
Non-Locked Fils
Side A 1 = door side is not locked
IP Configuration - Definition of the door side B (binary) that is not locked 00000000
  IP CarCalls Lock
Non-Locked Fils
Side B 1 = door side is not locked
EAZ Configuration - Enable user-defined floor names. YES
  Use Text ››YES: under EAZ Text, a two-digit floor name can be entered NO
for each floor that appears in the FST display and in all LON
position indicators
››NO: floor names 0,1,2 .. are displayed in the FST display and
all LON position indicators
EAZ Configuration - Two-digit designation for each floor (see Use Text) 2 ASCII
  EAZ Text characters
 Text
EAZ Configuration - Initial value for the position indicator code output on the FPM. 0 ... 1
  Bottom Flr. Car 0: code starts at bottom floor with "00000000"
1: code starts at bottom floor with "00000001"
The type of position indicator code can be set under EAZ type
(see „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X13“ page 56).
EAZ Configuration - Initial value for the position indicator code output on the ADM X3. 0 ... 1
  Bottom Flr. Hall ››0: code starts at bottom floor with "00000"
››1: code starts at bottom floor with "00001"
The type of position indicator code can be set under ADM-EAZ
type.
EAZ Configuration - Activation of the position indicators at the braking point when Show Target
  Target-Floor Car approaching a floor. Floor
››Show Target Floor: the target floor is already displayed at the Show Physical
braking point. This may lead to floor texts being skipped if the Floor
deceleration distances cover multiple floors.
››Show Physical Floor: the target floor is displayed after reaching
the level range.
EAZ Configuration - Type of the connected LON position indicators. Depending on EAZ-256/40, /64
  LON-EAZ type the type, the options set under LON EAZ Config have different EAZ-VFD/LCD
meanings (see description of the respective position indicator). EAZ-TFT
EAZ Configuration - For configuring selected LON position indicators. 0 ... 255
  LON-EAZ Number Each connected LON position indicator has a unique number (0
... 255). If 255 is set here, the settings apply for all connected
LON indicators.
EAZ Configuration - Options for the connected LON position indicators. Depending 00000000 ....
  LON-EAZ Config. on the LON-EAZ type, the set options have different meaning 11111111
(see description of the respective position indicator).
EAZ Configuration - Transfer of a configuration file from the plugged-in PC card to the YES
  LON-EAZ Download LON indicators selected under LON-EAZ Number NO
EAZ Configuration - Access code for the remote function. With indicator types 00000 ...
 IRT-code EAZ-VFD and EAZ-LCD, the FST controller can be configured 99999
via the indicator using the FST-IRT infrared remote control. To
use this function, it is necessary to enter the access code set
here (see short instructions - FST-IRT Infrared Remote Control).

96 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

EAZ Configuration - Dim the EAZ-256 and EAZ-TFT LON display while the car 00000000 ...
 Display Dimming lighting is switched off (energy conservation). The dimming func- 00000111
tion can be switched on separately for car and landing indicators.
›› 00000000: dimming function off
›› 00000001: only car indicators are dimmed
›› 00000010: only landing indicators are dimmed
›› 00000011: all indicators are dimmed
EAZ Configuration- Freely programmable scrolling text for EAZ-256 position indi- 20 ASCII
  Free EAZ-256 Text cator. The scrolling text may contain up to 20 ASCII characters characters
and is activated via the "freier EAZ-256 Text anzeigen" input
function. (see „6 Programmable I/O ports“ page 137)
Chime Functions - Activate chime function. YES
  Chimes Enabled NO
Chime Functions - Pulse length of the chime trigger signal 0 ... 5 sec
  Chime Duration
Chime Functions - Distance of the car to the level position of the target floor at 0 ... 9999 mm
  Chime Trigger which the chime trigger signal is output.
Chime Functions - The chime also sounds with closed car doors if the car is already YES
  Chime when in flr at the target floor when the lift is called with a landing call NO
Chime Functions - Selection of chime control, if it could logically take place with a Doors-Selective
  Car Chime possible selective door openig. not
Doors-Selective
Chime Functions - Chime sounds for landing and/or car calls. Landing calls
  Landing Chimes Car+Landing
calls
ID's - Identification of the FST controller in group mode. The setting A ... H
  Lift ID-Number must correspond to the jumper setting (JK1, JK2 and JK3) on
the FSM car top control module (see „Jumper JT: assignment
of the car doors“ page 63) and FPM car operating panel
module! If this fails, the installation is shut down with DRM-CAR
COMMS FAIL (see „8.1 Error messages“ page 161)(DRM–CAR
COMMS FAIL). Single lifts are always set to lift A.
ID's - Installation location, identification of the FST controller for 20 ASCII
  Lift ID-Name modem, remote data transmission and PAM (LMS) characters
ID's - NEW LIFT factory number of the FST controller 20 ASCII
  NEW-Factory No. characters
ID's - Factory number of the installation assigned by the lift 20 ASCII
  Lift Manufac. No. manufacturer. characters
ID's - Code number of a project-specific software version (is only 000000 ....
 Project-Code issued with special projects; do not change!) 999999
Group Settings - See GST manual
  GST-Menu
Group Settings - See ID's / Lift ID-Number. A ... H
  Lift ID-Number
Group Settings - Integrate FST controller in a GST group controller (see GST YES
  Group Member manual). NO
Group Settings - Floor offset with respect to bottom floor of the entire group (see 0 ... 15
  Group Floor Offset GST manual).
Group Settings - The value set under Group Floor Offset is defined as the YES
  Flr Offset-Car bottom floor for the position indicator in the car (if not set, the NO
value "0" is used, see GST manual).
Group Settings - The value set under Group Floor Offset is defined as the YES
  Flr Offset-Landing bottom floor for the landing position indicators (if not set, the NO
value "0" is used, see GST manual).
Group Settings - Assignment of the FST to the individual bus lines of the group in 00 ... FF
  ADM-Bus Mask-1 normal operation (see „5.5.3 ADM bus masks“ page 111).

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 97

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Group Settings - This bus mask is used for group separation if the FST is sepa- 00 ... FF
  ADM-Bus Mask-2 rated from the group.
Assignment of the FST to the individual bus lines of the group in
simplex mode ("separated group mode", see GST manual).
Anti Nuisance - Maximum permitted number of simultaneously acknowledged 0 ... 63
  Maximum Car Calls car calls. This parameter is intended to prevent unnecessary
drives caused by car calls. A reasonable setting is the number of
persons specified under load capacity.
Anti Nuisance - All car calls are cleared if there is no photocell interruption after 0 ... 63
  Stops w/o Exit the set number of stops. This parameter is intended to prevent
unnecessary drives caused by car calls.
Anti Nuisance - If the "car empty" input is activated (see „4.3 Car top control YES
  Empty Car Sense module FSM-2“ page 61), no car calls are accepted. This NO
parameter is intended to prevent unnecessary drives caused by
car calls. Only activate if the weight sensor is equipped with an
empty load contact and this contact is connected to the FSM!
Anti Nuisance - Activates the weight control on each car call. The first car call is
  Weight / Car-Calls always accepted. Every other call is acknowledged if an addi-
tional weight of 75kg is also detected.
Anti Nuisance - All car calls against the current direction of travel are cleared YES
  Call Direction when the direction changes (e.g., upon reaching an end floor). NO
This parameter is intended to "educate" passengers on how to
use the two-button controller correctly. Only activate if using a
two-button controller!
Anti Nuisance - When approaching the target floor, both landing calls (up and YES
  Always clear Up/Dn down) are always cleared. This parameter prevents unnecessary NO
drives caused by "double calls" from one passenger when using
the two-button controller. Only activate if using a two-button
controller!
Anti Nuisance Activation of the emergency-call anti-nuisance protection No Filter
 Emergency-Call ››No Filter: emergency-call filter not active, emergency calls are Ignore
always forwarded. door-status
››Ignore door-status: emergency calls from the car are only Observe
suppressed during the drive. door-status
››Observe door-status: emergency calls from the car are
suppressed during the drive and while the car door is open
while on the floor.
Car Ventilator - Controller programs of the car ventilator (see „5.5.4 Car ventila- Switched off
  Control Mode tion“ page 111). Manual On/Off
Manual +
Off-Delay
Automatic +
Off-Delay
Car Ventilator - Run-on time of the car ventilator in modes Manual+Off-Delay 0 ... 3600 s
  Vent. Off Delay and Automatic+Off-Delay.
Car Ventilator - Invert the ventilator output on the FSM. YES
  Output Inverted NO
Car Light - Automatic, time-delayed shutdown of the car lighting after every 0 ... 9999 s
  Light Off Delay drive.
Car Light Monitoring of the car lighting by means of voltage sensor on the YES
  Light Monitoring FSM. If the parameter is activated, the car lighting function is NO
monitored and the installation is shut down if the car lighting fails
with CAR LIGHT FAILURE (see „8.1 Error messages“ page
161).
Car Light Switch off the car lighting after an evacuation drive. YES
  Evac. -Light Off NO

98 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Car-Operate-Panel Position indicator code output by the FPM. HEX
  EAZ type ››HEX: binary code HEX+n
››HEX+n: binary code with offset from parameter "HEX+n Offset" 1-of-N
››1-of-N: there is a separate signal for each floor (only possible GRAY
with installations with up to eight floors)
››GRAY: Gray code
The initial value of the bottom floor can be set under Bottom
Flr. Car (see „EAZ Configuration -
  Bottom Flr. Car“ page 96).
Car-Operate-Panel Type of car acknowledgement lamps (important for avoiding LED
  Lamp type flickering). Filamt
If car call clearing is to be used by twice actuating acknowledged
car calls, "LED" must be set.
Car-Operate-Panel Function of the FPM-1 X4.39 / FPM-2 X3.4. (see „5.5.5 Display 0 00000000 ....
 Display-0 ... 2“ page 111). 11111111
Car-Operate-Panel Function of the FPM-1 X4.38 / FPM-2 X3.2. (see „5.5.5 Display 00000000 ....
 Display-1 0 ... 2“ page 111). 11111111
Car-Operate-Panel Function of the FPM-1 X4.5 / FPM-2 X3.3. (see „5.5.5 Display 0 00000000 ....
 Display-2 ... 2“ page 111). 11111111
Car-Operate-Panel The door open button signal (FPM-1 X4.35, .36 / FPM-2 X1.11, YES
  OPEN = A+B X2.11) is active for all present car doors NO
Car-Operate-Panel The door close button signal (FPM-1 X4.2, .3 / FPM-2 X1.12, YES
  CLOSE = A+B X2.12) is active for all present car doors NO
Car-Operate-Panel The door open button signal (FPM-1 X4.35, .36 / FPM-2 X1.11, YES
 OPEN=last X2.11) is only active for the last-opened car door NO
Car-Operate-Panel Control of a card reader for enabling car calls in the car. Only YES
  Card Reader activate after consulting NEW LIFT as it is necessary to modify NO
the order-specific wiring diagrams! If this parameter is activated,
car calls can only be placed with a card reader!
Car-Operate-Panel Clear pending car calls after activating the card reader again. YES
  -“- ClearOpt NO
Car-Operate-Panel Separate landing chime for upward travel present on the car roof. YES
 Chime-Roof The chime signal is output on FPM output "Display 1" (FPM-1 NO
X4.38 / FPM-2 X3.2) if parameter Display1=00000000 is set
(see „5.5.5 Display 0 ... 2“ page 111).
Car-Operate-Panel Separate landing chime for downward travel present on the YES
 Chime-Floor car floor. The chime signal is output on FPM output "Display 2" NO
(FPM-1 X4.5 / FPM-2 X3.3) if parameter Display2=00000000
is set (see „5.5.5 Display 0 ... 2“ page 111).
Car-Operate-Panel Evaluate the door open button signal (FPM-1 X4.35, .36 / FPM-2 YES
  DoorOpen NC X1.11, X2.11) as NC normally closed. NO
Car-Operate-Panel Activate flashing mode of the overload display (FPM-1 X4.6). YES
  O-Load Blink NO
Car-Operate-Panel Function of the FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14 input (see „5.5.6 Pin 0 .. 99
  Pin-34 Functn 34 function“ page 112).
Car-Operate-Panel Activate the additional inputs for special functions on the FPM. YES
 Xtra-Inputs NO
Car-Operate-Panel Switch off the acoustic car call acknowledgement (button clicks). YES
  Click Off This function only has an effect if the FPM-2 is used. NO
Car-Operate-Panel
  Chk ack. lamps
Car-Operate-Panel An already acknowledged car call can be cleared by placing the YES
 2xCall=Clear call another two times. NO
This function is only available if Lamp type = LED is set.
Car-Operate-Panel Initial value of the binary code for the floor output on the FPM. 0 ... 15
  HEX+n Offset This value only has an effect if EAZ type = HEX+n is set.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 99

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Fireman Options The fire standards observed during fireman service (see Fireman EN 81-72 (2015)
  Fire Standards Service manual). EN 81-72
(old-2003)
AS-1735
(Australia)
TRA-266
SIA
Hong Kong
Daimler Typ-C
Fireman trans-
port drive
ASME
PUBEL (Russia)
EL AMA 98
(Sweden)
Duesseldorf
Frankfurt-Main
Fireman Options A fire signal generated by an ADM landing button module auto- YES
  Fire->Fireman(ADM) matically activates fireman service after reaching the fire main NO
floor (see System description - Fireman mode control).
Fireman Options A fire signal generated by a programmable I/O port automatically YES
  Fire->Fireman(I/O) activates fireman service after reaching the fire main floor (see NO
System description - Fire recall control).
Fireman Options Fireman mode can only be started if an ADM signal triggered the YES
  Only ADM ->Fireman fire signal. NO
Fireman Options Fireman service can only be switched off on the main floor (see YES
  Off only in M-Flr Fireman Service manual). NO
Fireman Options Default position of the car doors on the main floor during a fire YES
  Door Open in M-Flr signal (see Fireman Service manual). NO
Fireman Options Target floor of the evacuation drive during a fire signal (see 0 ... 63
  Fire Main Floor System description - Fire recall control).
Fireman Options Activation of the car doors after reaching the fire main floor (see All doors
  Fire MainFlr Doors System description - Fire recall control). door A only
door B only
door C only
Fireman Options The fire input is evaluated as a smoke detector signal (see Goto Alarm
  Smoke Evac. Plan System description - Fire recall control). Floor
Goto Alarm
Floor + 1
Goto Alarm
Floor - 1
MainFlr/
MainFlr+1
Fireman Options Emergency landing can also be changed after the start of the YES
  Smoke alarm-Prio fireman drive (by changing the smoke detector situation, see NO
System description - Fire recall control)
Fireman Options The fire input is evaluated as a pulse and must also be reset YES
  Smoke drive Thru again (see System description - Fire recall control). NO
Fireman Options The fire input is evaluated as a pulse and must be reset again YES
  Fire sig. Pulsed (see System description - Fire recall control). NO
Fireman Options If, in the event of smoke development without a pending fire 0 ... 20 s
 DeadMan-DoorClose message, the photocell is interrupted, the doors can be closed
by holding down the door close button. All calls are cleared and
the lift moves to the desired floor.
Fireman Options If the lift moves away from the fire main floor in the event of a YES
  DO allowed fire, a stop to change direction is initiated on the next floor. This NO
occurs by default with closed doors.
This option allows the doors to be opened during a stop to
change direction by pressing the door open button.

100 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Fireman Options Reset the fireman service procedure completely. Should be YES
 Safety-Curtain performed after every change in the FIREMAN SERVICE menu NO
(see Fireman Service manual).
Fireman Options Reset the fireman service procedure completely. Should be YES
  Fireman Mode Reset performed after every change in the FIREMAN SERVICE menu NO
(see Fireman Service manual).
Weight Sensor Operating principle of the weight sensor. ANALOGUE
 Sensor-Type ››ANALOGUE: an analogue weight sensor with a separate
bus connection makes available the load of the car as a DIGITAL
percentage. The switching levels for empty load, full load and LCS Load-
overload must be set under Level-Empty, Level-Full and Control-Sys
Level-OverL.
››DIGITAL: a digital weight sensor with separate outputs for
empty load, full load and overload is connected to the terminals
of the FSM (see „FSM-2 terminal strip X5“ page 64). The
switching levels are set directly on the weight sensor.
››LCS Load-Control-Sys.: the LCS is used as the weight sensor
(see LCS manual).
Weight Sensor Setting of the load threshold up to which the car is still consid- 0 ... 1000 kg
  LCS Settings ered to be empty (see LCS manual).
 Threshold-Empty
Weight Sensor Setting of the load threshold above which the car is considered
  LCS Settings to be full.
  Threshold Full
Weight Sensor Rated lift capacity of the car (see LCS manual). 0 ... 30000 kg
  LCS Settings
  Lift max. capacity
Weight Sensor Specification of the reference load with which calibration of the 0 ... 30000 kg
  LCS Settings LCS is performed (see LCS manual).
  Ref. weight (L2)
Weight Sensor Calibration of the empty load. With this function, the empty car YES
  LCS Settings weight is measured and used as the basis for detecting the NO
  Cal. Empty (L1) empty load threshold (see LCS manual).
Weight Sensor Calibration of the reference load. With this function, the car YES
  LCS Settings weight is measured with the set reference load and forms the NO
  Cal. Ref-weight (L2) basis for detecting a full load and overloading (see LCS manual).
Weight Sensor Recalibration of the weight sensor with LCS after a completed YES
  LCS Settings arrest test. With this function, any distortions in the load meas- NO
  Correct Offset urement curve as a result of the arrest test are eliminated.
Weight Sensor Calibration of the LCS in the car directly via the car operating YES
  LCS Settings panel. With this type of LCS calibration, the load threshold to be NO
  Cal.L1/L2 from COP calibrated is entered and the calibration activated with the help of
the door open button as well as the car call button for the bottom
floor in combination with a NEW LIFT position indicator. (see
LCS manual).
Weight Sensor Various methods for compensating for static load differences that OFF
  LCS Settings are measured between floors. Using floor table
  Auto Adjustment These differences may arise when using compensation chains. Dynamic - per
    Chain Compensation Compensation may, however, also be required in the event of drive
mechanical tension, e.g., due to irregular dimensions in the rails
or uneven tension in the suspension cables.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 101

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Weight Sensor Is only displayed if Auto Adjust - Chain Compensation = ON
  LCS Settings Dynamic - per drive. OFF
  Auto Adjustment The Dynamic - per drive compensation mode compen-
   Flr-0:offset->0 sates for differences in the load measurement that occur shortly
after leaving the floor and shortly before arriving at the target
floor.
In this way, it is possible to compensate for differences that occur
on account of the chain length below the car.
Upon reaching the bottom floor, all compensation values in this
option are reset.
Weight Sensor Is only displayed if Auto Adjust - Chain Compensation = -30000 ...
  LCS Settings Using floor table. 30000 kg
  Auto Adjustment Enables a check and manual adjustment of the automatically
   Floor values generated compensation floor values. One compensation value
Offset (kg) is available per floor.
Weight Sensor Is only displayed if Auto Adjust - Chain Compensation = YES
  LCS Settings Using floor table. NO
  Auto Adjustment Automatically generates the compensation floor table.
   Generate Table The measurement can be started from any floor. The car should
be empty for this purpose.
The car moves to the bottom floor in drive mode and then moves
upward to each floor with closed doors. After each floor, the
compensation value is measured and recorded.
Weight Sensor To permanently compensate for empty load deviations with YES
  LCS Settings the load control system, the car weight is reset to 0 kg if the NO
  Auto Adjustment lift stands for longer than 2 hours without a drive request and
  Drift Compensation without a change in load.
Important: This function must not be activated in freight lifts or in
lifts in which there is a high probability that heavy objects will be
stored in the lifts for a longer period of time.
Weight Sensor If the lift is stopped for longer than 10 sec with closed car door, ON
  LCS Settings a car load of less than 30 kg is automatically corrected to 0 kg. OFF
  Auto Adjustment Larger car loads cannot be corrected.
  Auto Zero <30kg
Weight Sensor All dynamic weight offsets of the LCS are cleared. YES
  LCS Settings Restart of the LCS module. Parameters are not NO
  Auto Adjust lost.
  LCS-Reset
Weight Sensor › 00000001: 00000000
  LCS Settings Display measurement during the drive
 Options ›00000010:
If Auto Adjust/Dynamic - per drive is set,
an offset is automatically cleared on floor 0.
Weight sensor Overload input on the FST X1.17. NO
  Digital Settings LO: NO function NC
  OverLd-FST Input HI: NC function
Weight sensor Full load input on the FST X1.18. NO
  Digital Settings LO: NO function NC
  FullLd-FST Input HI: NC function
Weight sensor Overload input on the FSM-2 X5.4. NO
  Digital Settings LO: NO function NC
  OverLd-FSM Input HI: NC function
Weight sensor Full load input on the FSM-2 X5.3. Active: NO
  Digital Settings Active LO: NO function Active: NC
  FullLd-FSM Input Active HI: NC function
Weight sensor Empty load input on the FSM-2 X5.2. Active: NO
  Digital Settings Active LO: NO function Active: NC
  EmptyL-FSM Input Active HI: NC function

102 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Weight sensor Level for the empty load state when using an analogue weight 000 ... 200 %
  Analog Settings sensor
 Level-Empty
Weight sensor Level for the full load state when using an analogue weight 000 ... 200 %
  Analog Settings sensor
 Level-Full
Weight sensor Level for the overload state when using an analogue weight 000 ... 200 %
  Analog Settings sensor
Level-OverL
Speech Output Activates the control of a speech computer using an additional ON
 Activated SPK module (see „5.5.7 Speech output codes“ page 112).. OFF
Speech Output Type selection of the speech output. SPK-Module
  Speech Module Type SPK-Module: the SPK LON module forms the interface to the SAM-Module
speech computer
SAM-Module: speech output and any background music take
place via the SAM (see SAM manual)
Speech Output Encoding of the SPK module output. HEX
 SPK-Module ››HEX: binary code 1-of-N
 Output-type ››1-of-N: there is a separate signal for each output GRAY
››GRAY: Gray code
(see „5.5.7 Speech output codes“ page 112).
Speech Output Assignment of the speech output code (see „5.5.7 Speech output 0 ...255
 SPK-Module codes“ page 112)..
 Speech-Codes
Speech Output Volume of the speech output. This setting changes the volume 0 ... 100 %
  SAM-Module of both channels as a percentage, i.e., 100% corresponds to the
  Volume Chan. 1 volume set via potentiometers 1 and 2.
Speech Output Volume of the background music. This setting changes the 0 ... 100 %
 SAM-Module volume of channel 1 as a percentage, i.e., 100% corresponds to
  Volume Chan. 2 the volume set via potentiometer 1.
Speech Output Activate playing of the stored background music. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  Backgrnd Music
Speech Output Activate debug mode. In debug mode, the message ID and the ON
 SAM-Module associated text are announced. OFF
 Debug-Mode
Speech Output ON
 SAM-Module OFF
Only Disabled
Speech Output Repeat mode for fire/evacuation: 0 ... 3
 SAM-Module 0 = only one announcement is read
  Message repeat 1 = announcement is repeated 1x after 10 s
2 = announcement is repeated 2x after 10 s
3 = announcement is repeated every 10 s
Speech Output Activate floor announcement for door side A. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "floor-X" doorA
Speech Output Activate floor announcement for door side B. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "floor-X" doorB
Speech Output Activate announcement of door movements. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "door open/cls"
Speech Output Activate announcement of door nudging. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "door nudging"

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 103

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Speech Output Activate announcement of the next direction of travel between ON
 SAM-Module door opening and subsequent closing of the door. OFF
 "up/down"-early
Speech Output Activate announcement of the next direction of travel after door ON
 SAM-Module closing and start of lift movement. OFF
 "up/down"-late
Speech Output Activate announcement of overloading. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
 "overloaded"
Speech Output Announcement of full load activated. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "full load"
Speech Output Activate announcement of out-of-order conditions. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
 "out-of-Order"
Speech Output Activate announcement of special drives. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
 “special-drive“
Speech Output Activate announcement of evacuation drives. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
 “evacuation“
Speech Output Activate announcement of fireman drives. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
"fire-recall"
Speech Output Activate announcement of fireman service. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "fireman srvc"
Speech Output Active announcement of remote shutdowns. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
 “lift-off“
Speech Output Activate announcement of service mode. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  "service mode"
Speech Output Activate arrival gong. ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  arrival gong
Speech Output Activate direction-dependent arrival gong ON
 SAM-Module OFF
  as UP/DOWN
Speech Output Activate announcement of emergency calls. If the emergency ON
 SAM-Module call button was actuated, the following announcement is played OFF
  "emerg. call" "Your emergency call has been forwarded. Please be patient."
Speech Output Activates the "Floor blocked" announcement if this floor was ON
  SAM Module blocked via the I/O port. OFF
  “Floor Locked“
Project-Config Project-specific settings. Further information is available from 0 ... 9999
 Basis NEW LIFT.
  Basis [0...9] This menu item is only visible if a value > 0 is displayed under
Config / ID's / Project-Code.
Project-Config Project-specific settings for the LON bus of the CUS modules. 0 ... 255
 LON-Modules Further information is available from NEW LIFT.
  LON-Modules [0...29] This menu item is only visible if a value > 0 is displayed under
Config / ID's / Project-Code.
Hall Stations Lag time when switching back on the landing call release after 0 ... 30 s
  Landing Call Enabl special drives. Prevents immediate start-up of the car, e.g., after
switching off the inspection control.

104 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Hall Stations Position indicator code output on the ADM X3. HEX
  ADM-EAZ Coding ››HEX: binary code 1-of-N
››1-of-N: there is a separate signal for each floor (only possible GRAY
with installations with up to five floors)
››GRAY: Gray code
The initial value of the bottom floor can be set under Bottom
[Link].(see „Bottom Flr. Hall“ page 96).
Hall Stations Function of terminal 14 of the ADM-S (the function of terminal 14 0 .. 255
  Special Display 0 must be set to "soft-0" in the FST editor!).
››0: no function
››1: "door open" display for manual doors
››2: fireman service active
››3: car priority or landing active
››4: fireman service or fireman mode active
››5: out-of-operation display (only if installation has actually been
shut down)
››6: car priority active
Hall Stations Currently no function 0 .. 255
  Special Display 1
Lift-Off The remote shutdown input may be present multiple times: HARD
  Lift-Off Program ››FST X7.14 SOFT
››ADM X3
››RIO module
››GST (see GST manual)
After activating one of the inputs, the controller performs a "hard"
or "soft" remote shutdown drive to the remote shutdown floor.
Afterwards, the car lighting is switched off and the installation
is shut down. The door open button in the car operating panel
remains functional!
››HARD: all car and landing calls are cleared
››SOFT: car calls remain, landing calls are cleared
Lift-Off Target floor of the remote shutdown drive 0 ... 63
  Lift-Off Floor
Lift-Off After the remote shutdown drive, the door set here is opened All doors
  Lift-Off Doors and closed again before the car lighting is switched off. door A only
door B only
door C only
Lift-Off Lift-off floor = pseudo floor 0 YES
  Pseudo-Flr. Park NO
Special Functions Program number of the loading controller (see „5.5.8 Loading 0-3
  Loading Function function“ page 112).
  Program Nr.
Special Functions Only if program number = 3. For detailed description, (see „5.5.8
  Loading Function Loading function“ page 112).
 Options
Special Functions Maximum loading time. After this time elapses, the loading func- 0 ... 9999 s
  Loading Function tion is ended and the car door closes.
  Load Time-max
Special Functions Setting of the [Link] function (see „5.5.8 Loading func- 0 ... 15
  Loading Function tion“ page 112).
 [Link]
Special Functions Landing priority has priority over the loading function. YES
  Loading Function NO
 LPrio-Prec.
Special Functions Activation of the Lobby Stop function YES
 Lobby-Stop NO
 Enable

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 105

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Special Functions Defines the lobby floor 0 ... 63
 Lobby-Stop
 Floor
Special Functions Defines which door side opens on the lobby floor Door A only
 Lobby-Stop door B only
 Doors door C only
all doors
Special Functions Defines in which direction of travel the lift stops on the lobby 00000001
 Lobby-Stop floor. 00000010
 Control »00000001:
» only stops if the car is moving upward 00000011
»00000010:
» only stops if the car is moving downward
»00000011:
» always stops on the lobby floor
Special Functions Settings for the "Remote Entry" special function (see System YES
  Remote Entry description - Remote Entry). NO
 Activated
Special Functions With setting = YES; passenger does not need to activate target YES
  Remote Entry floor on the collection floor himself. NO
 Automatic-Call
Special Functions Duration of the wait time in which the lift is reserved on the 5..255 s
  Remote Entry collection floor.
  Maximum Wait
Special Functions The car must be empty before the remote entry drive begins. YES
  Remote Entry NO
  Must be Empty
Special Functions If a destination call is placed via I/O port, acknowledgement YES
  Remote Entry takes place via the ADM acknowledgement lamp. NO
  ADM ack. lamp
Special Functions Collection does not wait until the car is empty. YES
  Remote Entry NO
 [Link]
Special Functions Upon reaching the collection floor, the destination call is placed YES
  Remote Entry automatically. NO
 [Link]
Special Functions Remote call takes place without secondary release. YES
  Remote Entry NO
  No Enable-2
Special Functions Block the destination call via I/O port. YES = bypass block YES
  Remote Entry NO
 [Link]
Special Functions Activation of bank control mode.
  Bank-Control
 Enabled
Special Functions A bit pattern is used to decide how the car with an empty load 00000000
  Bank-Control sensor behaves.
  Use Empty Car Mon. Bit 0 (right bit) 0 = no empty load sensor; 1 = parties are changed
on closed doors and empty load.
Bit 1; 0 = door closes as in normal operation; 1 = door remains
open until the car is empty
Bit 2...7 = no function at present

106 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Special Functions A bit pattern is used to decide how the landing calls are 00000000
  Bank-Control evaluated.
  Bank Control Bit 0; 1 (right bit 00 = landing calls in push-button mode (during
operation, the landing control illuminates); 01 = landing calls are
collected but not executed; 10 landing calls in party mode (the
same party is collected and executed).
Bit 2; 0 = car button push-button mode, only one car call
possible; 1 = car button actuations collected, multiple car calls
are possible.
Bit 3; 0 = car priority within the parties; 1 = car priority for all
parties.
Bit 4; 1 = all pending landing calls are cleared after 5 min.
Bit 5; 0 = forced pause between change of user groups of 1s; 1
= 10s
Bit 6; 1 = remote shutdown always allowed
Bit 7; 1 = upon landing on the target floor, bank control mode
automatically uses user group 0.
Special Functions Floor door sides A/B for user group assignment matrix. [0]...[31]
  Bank-Control It is recommended that the access masks be configured via the A 0..............0
User-Group Masks FST editor since this interface is more user friendly. B 0..............0
 
Special Functions Defines which busy displays are active with respect to the user 0..............0
  Bank-Control groups.
 [Link] It is recommended that the busy display mask be configured via
the FST editor since this interface is more user friendly.
Special Functions Floor on which the ramp drive begins. 0..63
  Ramp-Drive Settings for the "Ramp Drive" special function (see System
 StartFloor description - Ramp drive).
Special Functions Bit 0(00000001) = enable ramp drive Bit7-->00000000
  Ramp-Drive Bit 1/2(00000110) = speed (00=Vn,01=Ve,10=V1)
 Control Bit 3(00001000) = open door B, otherwise door A
Bit 4(00010000) = control retiring cam
Bit 5(00100000) = ramp drive can only be switched off in door
zone
Bit 6(01000000) = no out-of-operation display on position indi-
cator (EAZ)
Bit 7(10000001) = no function
Special Functions Upper limit of the ramp zone relative to the level position of the 0...9999 mm
  Ramp-Drive ramp floor; ramp drive not possible above this value. This value
 Hi-Limit can be determined by moving the lift with auxiliary mode to the
maximum height above level and then reading out the Pd value.
Special Functions Lower limit of the ramp zone relative to the level position of the -300...0 mm
  Ramp-Drive ramp floor; ramp drive not possible below this value. This value
 Lo-Limit can be determined by moving the lift with auxiliary mode to the
minimum height below level and then reading out the Pd value.
Special Functions Forced early shutdown of the ramp drive before the ramp zone is 0...255 mm
  Ramp-Drive exited.
 Pre-Limit This value must be determined on-site at the installation and
must be selected somewhat larger than the inertia path mechani-
cally travelled by the car after the ramp drive is electrically
switched off.
Special Functions Activation of the [Link] function. Calls can be secured YES
  [Link]-Security according to type and door side, i.e., in order to open the door, NO
 Enable a separate door release button from the CUS-66 LON module is
required.
Special Functions Maximum wait time for door release with pending car call. After 2...255 s
  [Link]-Security this time elapses, the lift returns to normal operation.
  [Link] Car

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 107

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

Special Functions Maximum wait time for door release with pending landing call. 2...255 s
  [Link]-Security After this time elapses, the lift returns to normal operation.
  [Link] Landing
Special Functions Mask [0..63] 00
  [Link]-Security Bit mask for call security and door side:
 Floor-Masks Bit 0 = call security for door side A
Mask Bit 1 = call security for door side B
Bit 2 = car call security is active
Bit 3 = landing call security is active
valid masks: 05 ... 07, 09 ... 11, 13 ... 15.
Inspection In inspection mode, enable the door open/door close button YES
  Door Test for door movement in dead man control. Door open/door close NO
buttons can be installed on the car roof and wired parallel to the
buttons of the car operating panel.
Inspection Inversion of the "Inspection ON" input on the FSM-2 X22.2 (NC YES
  I/P Inverted function) NO
Inspection Lag time before the UP inspection drive is started. 0..30 s
  Start Delay UP Can be used in combination with a pre-warning signal via I/O
port.
Inspection Lag time before the DOWN inspection drive is started 0..30 s
  Start Delay DN Can be used in combination with a pre-warning signal via I/O
port.
Evacuation The levelling zone for the evacuation stop on the evacuation floor 0 ... 250
[Link]
Zone
Evacuation Max. evacuation speed until a holding brake is applied 000 ... 500
[Link] - intermittent brake
Speed Max.
Evacuation Evacuation Speed Limit. The evacuation drive is cancelled if this 000 ... 700
[Link] speed is exceeded.
Speed Limit
Evacuation Max. allowed time for the autom. unpowered evacuation to 000 ... 999
[Link] complete.
Time Limit
Evacuation Start Delay starting from release of the evacuation signal 000 ... 255 s
Start Delay
Evacuation Specifies the evacuation floor for GST activation 0 ... 63
[Link] 
Temperature Levels Setting range for the temperature level 1. When it has been 0..99 °C;
Lev-1: Turn Fan On reached, an external fan via a relay can be controlled via I/O port 0 = deactivated
with the setting 00007584.
Temperature Levels Setting range for the temperature level 2. When it has been 0..99 °C;
Lev-2: Stop Lift reached, the system with a display message „MOTOR-ROOM 0 = deactivated
OVERHEAT„ is switched off, identical to the function of the
terminal X1.16 on the FST.
ESM-Settings Activates ESM mode YES
 Enable NO
ESM-Settings Start time for ESM mode on weekdays: 15 min increments HH:MM
  Mo-Fr Start
ESM-Settings Stop time for ESM mode on weekdays: 15 min increments HH:MM
  Mo-Fr End
ESM-Settings Start time for ESM mode on weekends: 15 min increments HH:MM
  Sa-Su Start
ESM-Settings Stop time for ESM mode on weekends: 15 min increments HH:MM
  Sa-Su End
ESM-Settings Wait time that elapses after the last call before ESM mode is 0 ... 255 min
  Sleep delay activated.

108 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Menu item Description Setting range

ESM-Settings Warm-up time of the components before the next drive 0 ... 255 s
  Warmup time
ESM-Settings EAZ display "Please wait" during ESM warm-up phase YES
  Warmup Text NO
ESM-Settings Sleep mode with open door. YES
  w. open doors When selecting this parameter, note the door release through NO
door spring/door coupler!
ESM-Settings Hydraulic installations only: YES
 Buffer-Park Park the lift on the buffers during the sleep time. NO
ESM-Settings Hydraulic installations only: YES
  B-Park Pump Ensures minimum pressure in the pistons while the lift is in the NO
buffer park position.
ESM-Settings Run-on time of the motor after B-Park Pump 0 ... 10 s
  B-Park Run-on
Blinking Approach Acknowledgement lamps of the landing and car calls flash while YES
approaching the target floor. NO
Car Call Priority Length of time that the current direction of travel has priority 0 ... 30 s
before changing direction. Important parameter for collec-
tive controls: the time must be set at least large enough that
a passenger who called the lift via a landing command has
sufficient time to enter the car and place a car call in the current
direction of travel (5 ... 15 sec depending on the size of the car).
If set too small, the car may be "snatched away" by a landing
command in the opposite direction before the desired car call
could be placed.
Departure Arrows Mode of the direction of travel outputs on the ADM X3.8, X3.9: YES
››"YES": direction indicator as departure arrow NO
››"NO": direction indicator as direction of travel arrow only when door
››"only when door open": direction indicator as departure arrow is open
only when car door is open
[Link] Max Maximum on-time of the departure arrows while the car is 0 ... 9999 s
stopped.
DoorC=Emerg-EndSw. With hydraulic lifts, DoorC input on pre-control module FST YES
X14. 6 is evaluated and stored as a top emergency end switch NO
according to EN81.
[Link] Runoff that the car continues to travel downward after activating 0 ... 255 mm
the apron contact.

5.5.1 Park drive programs

The FST controller has a scheduler (calendar) for realising time- and day-dependent park drive programs. Each
day of the week (SU - SA) can be divided into up to three time zones. For each of these time zones, different
parking programs consisting of parking floor & wait time can be set.

Code Description Setting range

Day Day of the week SU ... SA
Frm Start time of the time zone 0:00 ... 23:45
To End time of the time zone 0:00 ... 23:45
Prog Program 1 ... 3 (corresponds to time zone 1 ... 3) 0 ... 2
Floor Park floor 0 ... top floor
W-Time Wait time until the start of the park drive 0 ... 60 min

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 109

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

5.5.2 Show LON modules

After the “Search LON Modules” menu item has been performed, the FST makes available a list of all LON
modules connected to the LON bus.
This list is structured as follows:

LON-Modules [001/005]
Prg:FSM00117 010/002
ID:01 00 30 49 69 00
[00] [00] [00] [00]

A The first of five connected LON modules is displayed

B Module type "FSM-" with software version "00117" and appendix "010/002"
C LON ID of the module: "010030496900"
D First four configuration bytes of the module; use ¢ to scroll to the next bytes

£/¢ Switch to configuration bytes 5 ... 41

S+£ To next LON module

S+¢ To previous LON module

¤ Toggle line C with ADM modules

Display after pressing the ¢ button three times:

ID:01 00 30 49 69 00
[00] [00] [00] [00]
[00] [00] [00] [00]
[00] [00] [00] [00]

A LON ID of the module: "010030496900"

B Configuration bytes 1 ... 4 of the module
C Configuration bytes 5 ... 8 of the module
D Configuration bytes 9 ... 12 of the module

Display when paging through the module types (S+¢, S+£) and toggling with ADM modules (¤)

LON-Modules [004/005]
Prg:ADR21012 010/002
Floor=02 Door=A BS=0
[00] [00] [00] [00]

A The fourth of five connected LON modules is displayed

B Module type "ADR" with software version "21012" and appendix "010/002"
C Landing call module on floor 02, door side A and bus line 0
D First four configuration bytes of the module; use ¢ to scroll to the next bytes

110 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

5.5.3 ADM bus masks

The bus masks are two-digit hexadecimal values according to the following pattern.

1 = FST-2 is assigned to the bus line

0 = FST-2 ignores the calls of the bus line

Fig. 5.2: Bit function - ADM bus masks

5.5.4 Car ventilation

Setting Description
Switched Off Car ventilator is switched off
Manual On/Off Car ventilator is switched on and off via a button in the car operating panel
(FPM-1 X4.1 / FPM-2 X1.14)
Manual+Off-Delay Car ventilator is switched on via a button in the car operating panel (FPM-1
X4.1 / FPM-2 X1.14); shutdown occurs after an adjustable delay (see Vent. Off
Delay)
Automatic+Off-Delay Car ventilator is switched on automatically on each drive; shutdown occurs
after an adjustable delay (see Vent. Off Delay)

5.5.5 Display 0 ... 2

The FPM outputs “Display 0 ... 2” can display various operating states of the installation. The operating states to
be displayed are set to “1” in the corresponding control register according to the following diagram.

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Evacuation Display 0: output FPM-1 X4.39, FPM-2 X3.4

Fire mode Display 1: output FPM-1 X4.38, FPM-2 X3.3
Fireman service Display 2: output FPM-1 X4.5, FPM-2 X3.2
Landing priority
Car priority The output is activated if at least one of the
Park drive states is active (bit=1)
Out-of-order
No function

Fig. 5.3: Bit functions of displays 0 ... 2

If no operating states are selected in the control register (“00000000”), outputs “Display 1” and “Display 2” can
perform the following functions:

Display 1
››Output of the “chime-roof” signal if Chime-Roof=YES is set (see page 99)
››Load display for the Loading Function (see page 105)
››Attendant operation buzzer (see page 124)

Display 2
››Output of the “chime-floor” signal if Chime-Floor=YES is set (see page 99)

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 111

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

5.5.6 Pin 34 function

The input “loading button” (FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14) can have the following functions:

Setting Function
0 Loading button (see „5.5.7 Speech output codes“ page 112).)
1 Landing control OFF
2 Attendant operation ON (see „5.7.2 Attendant operation“ page 124).
3 VIP mode with "multiple call" ON
4 VIP mode with "single call" ON
5 Start button for fireman mode in Australia
6 Bank-Control OFF

5.5.7 Speech output codes

Speech code [1] specifies the initial value for the floor output. The floor outputs are added to the initial value,
encrypted as set under output type and output by the SPK module on the speech computer.
Speech codes [2..20] correspond to the controller states in the following table. The numerical value set in the
respective language code is encrypted as set under output type if the corresponding controller state occurs and
is output by the SPK module on the speech computer.

Speech code Controller state

Speech code[1] Initial value for the floor output
Speech code[2] Starting
Speech code[3] Door opening
Speech code[4] Door closing
Speech code[5] Door nudging
Speech code[6] Car priority switched on
Speech code[7] Car priority switched off
Speech code[8] Landing priority switched on
Speech code[9] Landing priority switched off
Speech code[10] Priority (car or landing) switched on
Speech code[11] Priority (car or landing) switched off
Speech code[12] Fireman service
Speech code[13] Fire mode
Speech code[14] Evacuation
Speech code[15] Forced stop
Speech code[16] Out-of-order
Speech code[17] Overload
Speech code[18] Full load
Speech code[19] Direction of travel UP
Speech code[20] Direction of travel DOWN

5.5.8 Loading function

The loading button is built into the car operating panel and can be used to stop the lift with open doors while it is
being loaded. The displays SPECIAL DRIVE in the car and OUT-OF-ORDER on the landing call panels illumi-
nate while the loading function is active.

Requirements
FST hardware: FST or FST-2XT/s
FST software: FST V1.100-0395 or higher
FPM software: FPM (5 22 1.1): FPM V51 or higher
FPM-2 (5 25 1.2): FPM-2 V08 or higher

112 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Loading programs
There are various programs for the loading function which can be selected via the FST menu. A loading display
can optionally be connected to the FPM that is displayed as soon as the loading function is active.

Setting Function
0 ››Acts on open and closed doors. Closed doors are opened.
››On floors with selective door program, only acts on the respective door side
››For floors with the "through loading" door program, always acts on both doors
››Incoming car calls are registered while the loading function is active, but are not executed
››At the end of the loading time, the loading function is automatically deactivated and the
affected doors return to their default position.
››An active loading function can be deactivated simultaneously for both doors.
»by
» pressing respective loading button again or
»by
» pressing the door close button
1 ››Only acts on open doors. Closed doors remain closed
››For floors with the "through loading" door program, always acts on both doors
››If the loading button is pressed again while the loading function is active, the loading time is
restarted.
››After the loading time has elapsed, the loading function is automatically deactivated. The
doors return to their default position
››An active loading function can be deactivated simultaneously for both doors
»by
» entering a car command or
»by
» pressing a door close button
2 ››Only acts on open doors. Closed doors remain closed
››For floors with the "through loading" door program, always acts on both doors
››Incoming car calls are registered while the loading function is active, but are not executed
››At the end of the loading time, the loading function is automatically deactivated and the
affected doors return to their default position.
››An active loading function can be deactivated simultaneously for both doors
»by
» pressing the loading button again or
»by
» pressing a door close button
3 ››On floors with selective door program, only acts on the respective door side
››On floors with the "through loading" door program, always acts on both doors
››The sequence can be freely programmed via the "Options" bit register
››Functionality of the loading process with loading program 3:
Config/Special Functions/Loading Function/Options = xVFSTLIO
»O
» = 0: loading function also acts on closed doors
= 1: loading function only acts on open doors; closed doors are not opened
»I
» = 0: car calls end the loading function and are processed
= 1: car calls have no effect; they are collected but are not processed
»L
» = 0: pressing the loading button again ends the loading function
= 1: pressing the loading button again restarts the loading time
»T
» = 0: door open button has no effect on the loading function
= 1: door open button starts the loading function
»S
» = 0: photocell interruption on the FSM has no effect on the loading function
= 1: photocell interruption on the FSM starts the loading function
»F
» = 0: photocell loading function also acts on closed doors
= 1: photocell loading function only acts on already open doors
»V
» = 0: photocell interruption always starts and extends the loading function
=1: photocell interruption only extends the loading function if it is already active
»x
» = not currently used

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 113

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Procedure
››Selecting the desired loading program:
Config / Special Functions / Loading Function / Program No. = 0 ... 3
››Setting the maximum loading time:
Config / Special Functions / Loading Function / Load Time-max. = 0-9999 (s)
››Setting the display mode of the loading display on the FPM-1 X4.38 / FPM-2 X3.2:
Config / Special Functions / Loading Function / [Link] = 0/1/3/(+8)

Display Controller state

0 Loading display inactive
1 Loading display active, illuminates upon activation and flashes 20 sec before the end of the
maximum loading time
3 Loading display active, does not illuminate until the last 20 sec before the end of the maximum
loading time
+8 If 8 is added to the set value, position indicators EAZ-256, EAZ-LCD and EAZ-VFD also display the
text "Loading activity".

››Setting the loading function on FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14:

Config / Car-Operate-Panel / Pin-34 Functn =0
››Setting the loading display function on FPM-1 X4.38 / FPM-2 X3.2:
Config / Car-Operate-Panel / Display-1 = 00000000
››The loading button is connected to FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14
››The loading display is connected to FPM-1 X4.38 / FPM-2 X3.2
››In loading program 0, always open both doors and hold them open:
››System / Factory Menu / Setting / Miscel-8= 00000010

ATTENTION! Both car doors are always opened, even if no shaft door is located behind them. Only use
this option with lifts with brick or concrete shafts. If the distance of the car to the shaft wall is greater
than 150 mm, there is a danger of falling! Risk analysis necessary.

5.5.9 Lobby Stop

The “Lobby-Stop” function prevents the car from moving past a selectable “lobby” floor. The lift always makes
an intermediate stop at the lobby to give the lobby personnel opportunity to look into the car.
The function has the following options:
Enable
The Lobby-Stop function is activated under Enable.
Floor
The “lobby” floor is set under Floor.
Doors
The car doors that are to be opened on the “lobby” floor are set under Doors.

5.5.10 [Link]-Security
With the “[Link]-Security” function (SDS: selective door security), it is possible to keep certain destination
doors closed after the arrival of the lift and thereby restrict access to these floors by passengers. A separate but-
ton in the landing call panel indicates by illuminating the acknowledgement that the lift has arrived and is waiting
for door release. Pressing this illuminated button allows the doors to be opened by the passengers waiting in
front of the lift. The additional button for door release is controlled via a separate LON module (CUS-66).

114 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Config

Max. Wartezeit IDR

Duration of the wait time that the lift waits on the floor for the door release: 3 ... 255 s
If the car door was not confirmed by the release button in the set time, the call is cleared and the lift returns to
normal operation.

Max. Wartezeit ADR

Duration of the wait time that the lift waits on the floor for the door release: 3 ... 255 s
If the car door was not confirmed by the release button in the set time, the call is cleared and the lift returns to
normal operation.

Floor-Masks
Setting of the floor masks for configuring the areas that are to be secured: 0 ... 15

Value Landing call security Car call security Door side B Door side A
05 - x - x
06 - x x -
07 - x x x
09 x - - x
10 x - x -
11 x - x x
13 x x - x
14 x x x -
15 x x x x

5.5.11 VIP mode

VIP mode is used to reserve a car for “very important people” (VIPs). You can select between two VIP modes:
››VIP mode 1: is triggered by the LMS or a programmable I/O port and switches all command buttons to the “dead
man mode”
››VIP mode 2: is triggered by the FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14 (key switch in the car) and has the functions
described in the following

VIP mode 2
››Is activated by a pulse on the FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14 (key switch or card reader)
››All pending landing calls are cleared and the landing control is locked
››With group lifts, the lift is removed from the group and returns all landing calls assigned to it back to the group
controller
››No later than 10 seconds after activation, a car call must be placed, otherwise the lift switches back to the nor-
mal mode
››All car calls already acknowledged at the time of activation are performed as usual
››In “multiple call” mode (see „5.5.6 Pin 34 function“ page 112), an unlimited number of car calls can be placed
and the VIP mode thereby extended accordingly
››In “single call” mode (see „5.5.6 Pin 34 function“ page 112), only one car call can be placed. Additional car
calls can only be placed by reactivating the FPM-1 FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 115

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

5.6 MAIN MENU - Positioning

Menu item Description Setting range
Floor Absolute level position of a floor. Value must not be changed 0 ... 9999999 mm
  Position ABS (see Installation and Commissioning manual).
Floor Level position of a floor relative to the bottom floor. Value is -2500 ... 250000 mm
  Position REL entered for each floor according to the installation drawing or
automatically determined with the aid of the learn drive (see
Installation and Commissioning manual).
Floor Switch-on point for the internally generated level signal below 0 ... 5000 mm
  Level UP the actual level position when moving up. Value corresponds
to the braking distance of the crawling speed in the upward
direction and is determined automatically during the calibra-
tion drive (see Installation and Commissioning manual).
Floor Switch-on point for the internally generated level signal above 0 ... 5000 mm
  Level DOWN the actual level position when moving down. Value corre-
sponds to the braking distance of the crawling speed in the
downward direction and is determined automatically during
the calibration drive (see Installation and Commissioning
manual).
Floor Switch-on point for the internally generated door zone signal 0 ... 2500 mm
  Zone Sw. UP below the actual level position.
Absolute positioning: set value to 200 mm!
Incremental positioning: do not change value; is determined
automatically during the learn drive! (see Installation &
Commissioning Manual).
Floor Switch-on point of the internally generated door zone signal 0 ... 2500 mm
  Zone [Link] above the actual level position.
Absolute positioning: set value to 200 mm!
Incremental positioning: do not change value; is determined
automatically during the learn drive! (see Installation &
Commissioning Manual).
Landing Approach distance for the individual drive speeds V1 ... V8 0 ... 99999 mm
  Landing UP when moving up. Values correspond to the braking distances
of the corresponding drive speeds when moving up. The
values are determined automatically during the calibration
drive. (see Installation & Commissioning Manual).
Landing Approach distance for the individual drive speeds V1 ... 0 ... 99999 mm
  Landing DOWN V8 when moving down. Values correspond to the braking
distances of the corresponding drive speeds when moving
down. The values are determined automatically during the
calibration drive. (see Installation & Commissioning Manual).
Global Resolution of the absolute encoder. Value indicates how many 0 ... 999.9999
  Resolutn. bits are sent by the encoder for each 0.5mm of car move- bit/0.5mm
ment. If this value is set incorrectly, the entered floor spacings
will no longer match the actual spacings and the car may hit
the end switch at full speed during the calibration drive (see
Installation and Commissioning manual)!
Global Direction of rotation of the incremental and absolute encoders Left
 Direction in the upward direction Right
Global Type of shaft positioning Absolute
 Encoder Incremt.
Global Number of floors in the lift system starting with zero (e.g., 8 0 ... 63
  Max. Floor floors -> setting = 7)
Global Length of the desired crawl distance. The set value is added -500 ... 500 mm
  Crawl Distance to the approach distance of all drive speeds V1 ... V8 deter-
mined during the calibration drive (set value = 0 -> direct
approach)
Global Only for absolute encoder: ON
  [Link] Mon. Uses the door zone B input signal on the bottom floor as OFF
reference position to ensure that the toothed belt does not
slide.

116 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

Menu item Description Setting range

Global Only for absolute encoder:
  Enc.B. Ref  Displays the reference value of the belt monitor in mm.
Global Measured deceleration distance of the fast inspection speed. 0 ... 5000 mm
 Inspectn.-Fast The set value specifies the deceleration points of the fast
inspection drive before the level position of the end floors. If
the value is set too small, the car can run into the end switch!
Value is always reset to 1000mm after the calibration drive
and can subsequently be changed!
Global Measured deceleration distance of the slow inspection speed -5000 ... 5000 mm
 Inspection-Up when moving up. The set value specifies the switch-off point
of the inspection drive before the level position of the top
floor. If the value is set too small, the car can run into the end
switch! Value should always be checked after a calibration
drive and extended if necessary!
Global Measured deceleration distance of the slow inspection speed -5000 ... 5000 mm
  Inspection Dn when moving down. The set value specifies the switch-off
point of the inspection drive before the level position of the
bottom floor. If the value is set too small, the car can run into
the end switch! Value should always be checked after a cali-
bration drive and extended if necessary!
Global Enables precise, automatic stopping during an upward drive 0 ... 5000 mm
Lock Position in inspection operation before the top floor. 0 = function is
switched off. Greater than 0 is the distance to the top floor
(position in mm).
Global Output of the internally generated encoder B signal (see YES
  ZoneB Output „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X13“ page 56). 24 V NO
is output if the car is located in the door zone.
Global Inversion of the internally generated encoder B signal (see YES
  ZoneB [Link]. „FST-2XT and FST-2XTs terminal strip X30“ page 59). NO
YES: 24 V is output if the car is not located in the door zone
NO: 24 V is output if the car is located in the door zone
Global Indicates whether the values set under Positioning YES
  [Link] - Floor - Zone [Link]/Down are virtual or real zone NO
signals. With absolute positioning, this parameter should
always be set to YES; with incremental positioning, it should
always be set to NO! If the value is set incorrectly, problems
with the door control and levelling may occur following level
adjustment!
Global Comparison of the zones under Positioning - Floor - 0...250 mm
  UCM-A3 Zone Zone [Link]/DOWN. If the zone length is greater than the
UCM-A3 zone, error message “*** WARNING *** One
or more door zones.....A3 Zone" is output.
The length of the UCM-A3 zone is dependent on the UCM-A3
calculation of the A3 actuator manufacturer, e.g., of the
holding brake, etc. See also the UCM-A3 manual.
Global Special values of the absolute encoder
 Encoder  Bit 0: 24 bit SSI (default = 25 bit)
Bit 1: single reading (default = double reading)
Bit 2: bypass the encoder plausibility filter
Bit 3: reserved
Bit 4: extension of the shaft range for the encoder value
Bit 5: reserved
Bit 6: reserved
Bit 7: reserved
Global Special settings for the drive.
 Miscel-D1  Changes only by NEW LIFT!
Global Special settings for the drive.
 Miscel-D2  Changes only by NEW LIFT!
Releveling Limits Relevelling when moving up starts at the set distance 0 ... 2500 mm
  Limit UP ON between car and level position (see „5.6.2 Relevelling limits“
page 122).

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 117

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

Menu item Description Setting range

Releveling Limits Relevelling when moving up stops at the set distance 0 ... 2500 mm
  Limit UP OFF between car and level position (see „5.6.2 Relevelling limits“
page 122).
Relevelling Limits Relevelling when moving down starts at the set distance 0 ... 2500 mm
  Limit DN ON between car and level position (see „5.6.2 Relevelling limits“
page 122).
Releveling Limits Relevelling when moving down stops at the set distance 0 ... 2500 mm
  Limit DN OFF between car and level position (see „5.6.2 Relevelling limits“
page 122).
Releveling Limits Increase the relevelling range with switched-off car lighting. 0 ... 5000 mm
  Limit DEEP This function reduces the number of relevelling operations for
a longer service life.
Cal-Results Speed when moving up for all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI -10000...10000 mm/s
 UP-Speed measured during the calibration drive
Cal-Results Acceleration distances measured during the calibration drive 0 ... 50000 mm
 UP-Accel. for all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for upward travel
Cal-Results Deceleration distances measured during the calibration drive 0 ... 50000 mm
 UP-Decel. for all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for upward travel
Cal-Results Acceleration times measured during the calibration drive for 0 ... 32767 ms
  UP -t_Accel. all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for upward travel
Cal-Results Deceleration times measured during the calibration drive for 0 ... 32767 ms
 UP-t_Decel. all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for upward travel
Cal-Results Speeds measured during the calibration drive for all drive -1000 ... 10000 mm/s
 DOWN-Speed speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for downward travel
Cal-Results Acceleration distances measured during the calibration drive 0 ... 50000 mm
 DOWN-Accel. for all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for downward travel
Cal-Results Deceleration distances measured during the calibration drive 0 ... 50000 mm
 DOWN-Decel. for all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for downward travel
Cal-Results Acceleration times measured during the calibration drive for 0 ... 32767 ms
 DOWN-t_Accel. all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for downward travel
Cal-Results Deceleration times measured during the calibration drive for 0 ... 32767 ms
 DOWN-t_Decel. all drive speeds V1 ... V8, VE, VI for downward travel
Cal-Results Speeds measured during the calibration drive at the result 0 ... 10000mm/s
  V80%-SpeedMon . measurement point before the level positions for deceleration
monitoring.
Cal-Results Speed measurement point before the level positions of the 0 ... 49999 mm
  V80%-Distance end floors for deceleration monitoring.
Pseudo Floors Additional stops without shaft doors. The "pseudo floors" are 0 ... 49999 mm
  Pos. (Rel.) additional floors without calls and doors. They can only be
reached via signals of the programmable I/O port and are
used, e.g., as locking positions for cable lifts without machine
rooms or parking floors between the regular floors (see
„6.4.10 Function “special drive”“ page 150).
Shaft Markers
  Pos. (Rel.)
Increm. Positioning Control register for incremental positioning: 00000000 ...11111111
 Control
0 = orientation drive enabled
0 = door zone correction enabled
0 = KO/KU-correction enabled
reserved
0 = incremental encoder plugged to FST-2 X12
1 = incremental encoder signal via ACP or RSI
0 = relevelling via position
1 = relevelling via BO/BU signal (INK-module only)
0 = KO/KU floors in HEX-coding
1 = KO/KU floors in GRAY-coding (INK-module only)
reserved
The default setting of the parameter is: 00000000. This
should only be changed after consulting NEW LIFT.

118 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

Menu item Description Setting range

Increm. Positioning With incremental positioning, an orientation drive to one of the YES
 Auto-Orien. end floors is always required after switching the controller off NO
and on (including after a power failure). The orientation drive
is started automatically after switching on the FST.
Increm. Positioning Delay of the orientation drive after switching on the FST. 0 ... 9999 ms
  Orien delay
Increm. Positioning Position of the BC switch in mm. The value is an absolute 0 ... 9999999 mm
 [Link] value, i.e., to determine the distance to the bottom floor, the
absolute value of the bottom floor must be subtracted from
the value entered here (see page 116). The value is deter-
mined automatically during the learn drive and must not be
changed.
Increm. Positioning Position of the switch for top correction in mm. The value is 0 ... 9999999 mm
 [Link] an absolute value, i.e., to determine the distance to the top
floor, the absolute value of the top floor must be subtracted
from the value entered here (see page 116). The value is
determined automatically during the learn drive and should
not be changed.
Increm. Positioning Length of the zone signal during relevelling with the BO (level 0 ... 250 mm
 ZoneB-Length at top)/BU (level at bottom) switch. The value is determined
automatically during the learn drive.
Increm. Positioning Length of the hysteresis of zone switch B. Value is determined -100 ... 100 mm
 ZoneB-Hysters automatically during the learn drive and is limited to 10 mm by
the software. If problems occur during the level adjustment,
the levelling for upward travel can be adjusted as described
in the Installation and Commissioning manual and the level-
ling for downward travel can be corrected by changing the
hysteresis value.
Increm. Positioning Level of zone switch B if the car is in the door zone. NO
  ZoneB Input NO: 0 V (open) NC
NC: +24 V (closed, standard).
Increm. Positioning Debounce time of zone switch B. Standard value. 5ms 0 ... 40 ms
 ZoneB-Debnce
Increm. Positioning Debounce time of zone switch B. Standard value. 5ms 0 ... 40 ms
 BOBU-Runoff
Increm. Positioning Level of the KO/KU switch if the car is on an end floor. NO
  KO/KU Input NO: 0 V (open, standard) NC
NC: +24 V (closed).
Increm. Positioning Only for incremental positioning. 0..63
  Gray LO-floor To ensure that end floor detection is available for long shafts
with a fast car, function is only possible with a LEK module.
Increm. Positioning Only for incremental positioning. 0..63
  Gray HI-floor To ensure that end floor detection is available for long shafts
with a fast car, function is only possible with a LEK module.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 119

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

5.6.1 Positioning parameters

For a better understanding of the parameters for absolute and incremental positioning, the most important set-
tings are shown graphically in the following two figures.

Positioning - Floor -
Position REL
Positioning - Positioning - Top Floor
Positioning - Global - Global - Positioning -
Floor - Crawl Distance Insp. UP Global -
Level UP [Link]
Positioning -
Landing -
Landing UP

Inspection drive
with vI

Normal drive
with v1..V8

Normal drive
with v1..V8

Positioning -
Landing -
Landing Down

Positioning - Positioning -
Floor - Global- Positioning - Floor -
Level DOWN Crawl Distance Position REL
Positioning - Positioning -
Global- Intermediate floor
Floor -
Level UP Crawl Distance

Positioning -
Landing -
Landing UP

Normal drive
with v1..V8

Normal drive
with v1..V8

Inspection drive
with vI

Positioning -
Landing -
Landing DOWN
Positioning - Positioning -
Floor - Positioning - Positioning - Global-
Level DOWN Global- Global- Insp. FAST
Insp. DOWN Bottom floor
Crawl Distance
Positioning - Floor -
Position REL

Fig. 5.4: Parameters for absolute positioning

120 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

Positioning - Floor -
Position REL
Positioning - Top Floor
Positioning - Global - Positioning -
Floor - Crawl Distance Floor -
Level UP Zone Sw. DOWN
Positioning - Positioning -
Landing - [Link]. -
Landing UP Positioning - [Link]
[Link]. -
ZoneB-Hysters

Normal Drive
with v1..V8

Normal Drive
with v1..V8

Positioning -
[Link]. -
Positioning - ZoneB-Hysters
Landing -
Landing DOWN
Positioning -
Positioning -
Floor - Positioning -
Level DOWN Floor -
Global- Zone [Link] Positioning - Floor -
Crawl Distance Position REL
Positioning -
Global- Positioning - Intermediate Floor
Crawl Distance Floor -
Positioning - Zone [Link]
Floor -
Level UP Positioning -
Landing -
Landing UP Positioning -
[Link]. -
ZoneB-Hysters

Normal Drive
with v1..V8

Normal Drive
with v1..V8

Positioning -
[Link]. -
Positioning - ZoneB-Hysters Positioning -
Landing - [Link]. -
Landing UP [Link]
Positioning - Positioning -
Floor - Positioning - Etage-
Level DOWN Global- Positioning - Floor -
Zone Auf Position REL
Crawl Distance
Bottom Floor

Fig. 5.5: Parameters for incremental positioning

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 121

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Positioning

5.6.2 Relevelling limits

Relevelling procedure during unloading:
››During unloading, the car moves upward
››If the car moves more than Limit DN ON from the level position, the relevelling procedure in the downward
direction starts at relevelling speed Vn
››If the car is less than Limit DN OFF from the level position, the relevelling speed is switched off and the car
brakes so that it comes to a standstill exactly at the level position
››Parameter Limit DN ON can be set as desired. It determines the point at which the relevelling proce-
dure is switched on. Parameter Limit DN OFF is determined according to the braking distance of the
relevelling speed. It must be optimised until the car relevels exactly.
››Parameter Limit DN ON must always be equal to or greater than parameter Limit DN OFF
This also applies to the relevelling procedure in the upward direction!

Limit DN On (relevelling activated)

unloading
Limit DN Off (relevelling deactivated)
level
Limit UP Off (relevelling deactivated)
loading

Limit UP On (relevelling activated)

Fig. 5.6: Setting relevelling

122 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Calls

5.7 MAIN MENU - Calls

Menu item Description Setting range
Call Floor - Landing call program for each floor: No Button
Config No Button: no landing button available STOPcollect
DOWNcollect: one button for downward calls avail-
able
UP-collect: one button for upward calls available
UP/DOWN: buttons for upward and downward calls
available
STOPcollect: upward and downward calls use the
same button
Call Floor - Door program for each floor: Single
Program Single: only one door side available through-loading
Selective: doors are handled selectively
Order: mutually interlocked car doors are handled in
the specified order
Sequence: mutually interlocked car doors are
handled in the order in which the calls were placed
Through loading: all car doors are handled
simultaneously
Call Floor - Door program for each car door: >A< ... X
Door X: door deactivated
>A<: door A activated with default position closed
<A>: door A activated with default position open
The same settings also apply to car doors B and C.
If an X is entered, the landing and cars for that side
of the door on that floor are locked.
Special Call Mode Call program for the landing and car calls Standard
(see „5.7.1 Special call mode“ page 123) Non-Collective
Single-Call Mode
2-Floors,1-Button
Non-Collect (Landing) (car-
collect, landing button)
Lift-Boy Mode Activate attendant operation (see „5.7.2 Attendant YES
operation“ page 124) NO
Power Fail Restore Time in which the set calls/commands are stored 0...255 sec
following a power failure ; default OFF = 0; recom-
mended 50 sec

5.7.1 Special call mode

The pending calls can be processed in three different ways:

Setting Method
Standard Landing and car calls are collected.
Non-Collective Only one call is accepted at a time.
The car is reserved as long as it is moving or a door is open.
With a reserved car, the landing control is blocked.
Single-Call Mode Only one command is accepted at a time.
The car is reserved as long as it is moving or a door is open.
With a reserved car, the landing calls are collected but not processed. When the
car again becomes available, the oldest call is processed first.
2-Floors,1-Button In the car, only one button is present for both floors.
Non-Collect(Landing) Combination of car-collect and landing button control

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 123

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Calls

5.7.2 Attendant operation

Attendant operation (lift-boy mode) requires a lift operator to be present at all times and functions as follows:
››Attendant operation can be switched on either permanently with the Lift-Boy Mode parameter or temporarily via
the FPM-1 X4.34 / FPM-2 X2.14 (see „5.5.6 Pin 34 function“ page 112).
››The landing calls are acknowledged but not processed automatically
››Each acknowledged landing call is signalled on the car operating panel by flashing of the corresponding car call
and the short sound of the buzzer (FPM-1 X4.38 / FPM-2 X3.3 “Display-2”)
››The lift operator processes the landing calls in sequence by pressing the flashing car calls

Settings:
››Pin-34 function = 2 (see „5.5.6 Pin 34 function“ page 112), if attendant operation is only to be tempora-
rily activated via a key switch
››Lift-Boy Mode = ON, if attendant operation is to be active permanently
››Display 1 = 00000000 (see „5.5.5 Display 0 ... 2“ page 111)
››[Link] = NO (see „5.5.8 Loading function“ page 112)

124 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - System

5.8 MAIN MENU - System

Menu item Description Setting range
Time-Date Time of the FST controller. Must absolutely be checked for [Link]
  Clock Setting correctness whenever maintenance is performed.
Time-Date Date of the FST controller. Must absolutely be checked for [Link]
  Date Setting correctness whenever maintenance is performed.
Time-Date Rule for automatic adjustment of daylight saving time. Off
  Daylight Saving No switching
European
USA
Password Setting Password for the commissioning security level: 0000 ... 9999
  Level: high Unlimited access and editing rights. Must absolutely be checked
for correctness whenever maintenance is performed.
Password Setting Password for the customer service security level: 0000 ... 9999
  Level: middle Limited access and editing rights (see „5.2 MAIN MENU - Lock
Menu“ page 85).
Password Setting Password for the maintenance security level: 0000 ... 9999
  Level: low Limited access and no editing rights (see „5.2 MAIN MENU -
Lock Menu“ page 85).
Language Language of the LCD-Display and the FST menu. German
English
French
Polish
Swedish
Portuguese
Recorder Start recording. Depending on the activated event channel, YES
  Recorder RESTART certain control-internal events are recorded with date and time. NO
If a PC card is inserted, the recording is stored on the card.
Shorter recordings (a few minutes) can also be performed
without a plugged-in card (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST
controller“ page 129).
Recorder Stop recording. YES
  Recorder STOP NO
Recorder Continue stopped recording. YES
  Recorder CONTINUE NO
Recorder Enable the "Detail" recording filter for the recording ON
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129). OFF
 Detail
Recorder Enable the "Weight Measures" recording filter for the recording
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129).
  Weight Measures
Recorder Enable the "Statistics" recording filter for the recording ON
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129). OFF
 Statistics
Recorder Enable the "Group Statistic" recording filter for the recording. ON
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129). OFF
  Group Statistic
Recorder Enable the "Drive Curve" recording filter for the recording ON
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129). OFF
  Drive Curve
Recorder Enable the "RIO traffic" recording filter for the recording
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129).
  RIO traffic
Recorder Enable the "Remote Activity" recording filter for the recording. ON
  Filter Setting (see „5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller“ page 129). OFF
  Remote Activity
Recorder - Stop recording on the PC card when the PC card is full. The YES
 Stop-when-full card is otherwise overwritten from the beginning (endless loop). NO
Only relevant with the predecessor FST-2/s controllers.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 125

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - System

Menu item Description Setting range

Update FST Update the FST software with a USB stick. YES
  Upd. f. USBStick NO
Update LON-Modules Update of all connected LON modules if a more recent software YES
  Upd. f. USBStick version is available on a USB stick. NO
  Upd. f. Intern
Update EAZ-Progrm  Update of VFD and LCD displays YES
NO
Config --> Backup Create a backup of the current FST configuration in an internal YES
buffer NO
Config <-- Backup Load the FST configuration from the buffer as current FST YES
configuration. All currently set parameters are thereby over- NO
written! Only activate this parameter after consulting NEW LIFT!
Copy MicroSD
Qwn SerNo.
Copy to Copy the FST configuration to a USB storage medium. YES
Config -> USBStick NO
Copy to Copy an FST recording to a USB storage medium. Copying is [Link]
Record -> USBStick performed block-wise per day. YES
NO
Copy to Currently no function! --
S/W -> USBStick
Copy to Copies a text file (.txt) to a USB storage medium. YES
Error List -> USB The text file contains the error list of the FST. NO
Copy From Copies a configuration file from a plugged-in USB storage YES
USBStick -> Config medium to the FST config. Attention! The existing configuration NO
is overwritten!
Format Currently no function! --
Clear USBStick

Factory Menu Display hidden menus. YES

  Hidden Menus After resetting or switching the FST off and back on again, the NO
parameter is reset to NO.
Factory Menus With the "YES" setting, an interval can be set under Service/ YES
  DCC: Allow Clr/Set  Service-Counters/Direction Change/ Interval NO
with Service-Counters/Set Interval. The set value is
thereby taken over permanently under Interval. By default,
this value should be set to "NO" unless an interval change was
made intentionally.
Factory Menu Reset long-term drive counter. YES
  Srvc Counter Reset  Only reset after consulting NEW LIFT. NO
Factory Menu Shortcut option for resetting the following text parameters: YES
  Cfg-Strings Reset  INSTALLATION-ID NO
ORDER-ID
NEW-FACTORY-NO.
MODEM/FAX-STRINGS
FLOOR-TEXTS
Factory Menu Shortcut option for resetting all I/O port RAW functions YES
  I/O-Config Reset  NO
Factory Menu Activates a 2 s delay after exiting the menus for the LANDING YES
 Settings CALLS OFF function (¥) NO
  ASAUS Protect 
Factory Menu Activates automatic target retry if a floor is passed. The lift stops
 Settings and moves to the passed floor again.
  Targ-Retry Inh 

126 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - System

Menu item Description Setting range

Factory Menu Automatic reset for the following DRM fault:
 Settings Bit 0: approach monitoring
 DRM-Reset  Bit 1: runtime monitoring
Bit 2: encoder error
Bit 3: zone error
Bit 4: speed monitoring
Bit 5: forced stop
Bit 6: brake error
Bit 7: reserved
Only reset after consulting NEW LIFT.
Factory Menu Repeat frequency of LON messages with position information.
 Settings Value is 000 by default. Only change after consulting NEW
 FSTAT2-Delta  LIFT.
Factory Menu All miscel. values (1-16) can be read with the FST editor
 Settings
  Miscel-1 ... Miscel-16 
Factory Menu Debounce time for detecting an emergency-stop error. Only 0 ...200ms
 Settings change the default value (10ms) after consulting NEW LIFT!
 EmergStop-Time 
Factory Menu Minimum time required by the lift to travel the DRM distance 0 ...30.0s
 Settings during the drive.
 DRM-Period  Only activate after consulting NEW LIFT.
Factory Menu Minimum distance that the lift travels during the drive within the 0 ... 2000mm
 Settings DRM period.
 DRM-Distance  Only activate after consulting NEW LIFT.
Factory Menu Maximum speed for bypassing the safety circuit bypass 0 ... 2000mm/s
 Settings
  V-Bypass Max 
Factory Menu Maximum permissible inspection speed 0 … 2000mm/s
 Settings
  V-Inspect. Max 
Factory Menu Maximum permissible auxiliary speed 0 … 2000mm/s
 Settings
  V-AuxiliaryMax. 
Factory Menu Delay between activation of the car lighting (car lighting ON) 0 ... 255s
 Settings and car lighting monitoring.
 [Link]  Increase value for time-delayed switching-on of lighting
Factory Menu Virtual, additionally reduced door zone. Set value applies for 0 ... 255mm
 Settings Zone [Link] and Zone [Link].
  [Link] Zone  Settings to be made only by NEW LIFT!
Factory Menu Time after which the car door is de-energized as soon as it is 0 ... 255s
 Settings closed.
  Deenergize Time 
Factory Menu Detection of a blockage of the photocell after the set time. This 0...999 sec
 Settings detection is used for further processing for group controllers as
  Photocell Max  well as building management systems.
Factory Menu Baud rate of the RS232 for the service interface (PC). This 38400 bps
 Settings parameter is only relevant for FST-2 controllers.
  Ser. X9 Baud 
Factory Menu Settings to be made only by NEW LIFT! 0
 Settings
  [Link] Mode 
Factory Menu
 Settings
  Time Sync. Master 
Factory Menu Switch off detection A3 YES
  EN 81 Options NO
  UCM A3 
Enabled 

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 127

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - System

Menu item Description Setting range

Factory Menu YES
  EN 81 Options NO
  UCM A3 
A3-Drive 
Factory Menu UCM A3 error triggering leads to returning in hydraulic systems. YES
  EN 81 Options NO
  UCM A3 
Err-Hydraulic 
Factory Menu During UCM A3 error triggering auxiliary mode and inspection YES
  EN 81 Options drive are possible. NO
  UCM A3 
Err=No Inspect 
Factory Menu YES
  EN 81 Options NO
  UCM A3 
Test with Spd. 
Factory Menu UCM A3 test, activate the anti creep device. During UCM A3 YES
  EN 81 Options test the anti creep device is activated, to be able to test service NO
  UCM A3  brakes.
Test w/o Ass 
Factory Menue  The inspection fast funktion is inactive during the drive from YES
  EN 81 Optionen reduced shaft head of an end floor. NO
  EN 81-20 
Insp-Fast Ctrl 
Factory Menue  The setting YES puts all landing calls and the keypad out of YES
  EN 81 Optionen service. NO
  EN 81-20  The car buttons function remains active.
No Rem. Access 
Factory Menue  The setting YES activates the relay K4 on the FSM-2 for the YES
  EN 81 Optionen control of an optical-acoustic signal unter the car. NO
  EN 81-20 
Bypass FSM-K4 
Factory Menue  The setting YES activates the function sequence for the conti- YES
  EN 81 Optionen nuous signal status testing of the light curtain during the door NO
  EN 81-20  opening.
Test Photocell 
Factory Menue  The setting YES activates the shutdown of the power supply via YES
  EN 81 Optionen relay K5 (FSM-2) of the light curtain. NO
  EN 81-20 
PC PowerFSM-K5 
Factory Menue  Turn-stop behaviour in case of overtemperature of hydraulic YES
  EN 81 Optionen systems. NO
  EN 81-20 
Hydr. Turn-stop 
Factory Menue  The setting YES activates the monitoring function of door YES
  EN 81 Optionen contact circle. NO
  EN 81-20 
Test Door Scct 
Factory Menue  The setting YES allows to deactivate the signal OPEN DOOR YES
  EN 81 Optionen when during opening the door the reversing input is active. NO
  EN 81-20 
Glass Door Mon 
Factory Menue  This parameter allows to deactivate ADM-Reset key code. YES
  EN 81 Optionen NO
  EN 81-20 
[Link] ADM 
Factory Menu User-defined 20-character DRM text
 DRM-Program1:Texts 
Factory Menu User-defined 20-character DRM text
 DRM-Program2:Texts 

128 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - System

Menu item Description Setting range

Factory Menu User-defined 20-character DRM text
 DRM-Program3:Texts 
Factory Menu Config parameter transfer via LON BUS. YES
  Clone FST-2 LON  With this parameter, the process is started via a LON-bus cable NO
(cloning).
Factory Menu Config parameter transfer via RS232 (X9). YES
  Clone FST-2 SERIAL  With this parameter, the process is started via a serial null NO
modem cable (cloning).
Factory Menu Used to lock the keypad of the FST to protect against accidental OFF
Keypad auto-lock  actuation. Unlock with the S button. ON
Panel Test Special function for testing landing call panels and car operating YES
  panels (see System description – Panel test). NO
Guide Settings Lag time before the guide help text appears 0-30 sec
  Help waittime
Guide Settings Selection of the standard display of the guide as informative YES
  NBM Display "emergency mode monitor". Function in the event of power NO
failure only possible with UPS.
FST Reset! Perform RESET of the FST controller YES
NO

5.8.1 Recording filter of FST controller

Messages for external I/O modules

Max. data recording quantity

Group statistics messages
Detailed software states
LON bus messages

Load measurement
Shaft positioning
Drive messages

PAM messages
Safety circuit

(Mbyte card)
Car position
Drive states
Door states

Drive curve
Calls

Recording
filter Meaning
Detail Detailed error High
diagnosis x x x x x x x x x

Load Diagnostics for load Low

measure- measurement x
ment
Statistics Creation of call and Low
x x x x
drive statistics
Group Creation of Medium
x x x x x
statistics group statistics
Drive curve Evaluation of the Very
x
ride quality high
RIO- Diagnostics of the external I/O High
x
traffic traffic
Remote Diagnostics of external controllers Low
x
control (remote data transmission)

5.8.2 Copy from / to USB

This menu item is used to copy to a USB stick or from memory media to the FST controller. For this function,
only USB sticks with “FAT32” formatting and a maximum memory size of 8GB are to be used.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 129

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Doors

Copy to:

Config -> USBStick Copies a configuration file located on a USB stick to the FST. Attention! The existing configu-
ration is thereby overwritten!
Record -> USB Stick Copies a daily recording file for a single day (select up to 31 days) to the USB stick. Using the
NEW LIFT Elevision Light Software, this file enables a detailed view of the processes of the
FST.
SW -> USB Stick Currently no function

Copy from:

Config -> USBStick Copies the FST configuration file to a USB stick. For unique identification, beginning with
version V2.000-0102, the file is given a unique file name that is made up of the NEW LIFT
factory number, installation ID and the lift factory number, provided this information has been
recorded.

5.8.3 Update via USB

Update FST This function enables an FST-2XT/s update by means of a USB stick. The update
procedure must absolutely be observed. Only USB sticks with "FAT32" formatting and a
maximum memory size of 8GB are to be used. Download the current file from the NEW
LIFT website [Link] On the
USB stick, create a folder named "update" (case sensitive!). Copy the original file (name
and type unchanged) to this folder. Before starting the update, backup the current configu-
ration under System/ Config-->Backup. Use S+E to view the current software SW
Ver. :V2. 000-XXX. The controller is now to be switched OFF and back ON again. Wait
until the FST-2XT/s has completely booted and then plug the USB stick into USB port X41.
The USBStick OK message appears. Switch the auxiliary mode switch to ON and start
the update under Main Menu/System/Update FST. With the reboot time, the update
takes about 4 minutes. UseS+E to check whether the update was successfully completed
by checking the software version SW Ver. :V2. 000-XXXX and the drive version DRV
VER.: XXXX . Now use auxiliary mode control to check whether the direction of travel
and the position P= XXXXXXX change according to the direction. Now remove the USB
stick; the USB Stick REMOVED message appears. The FST-2XT/s update is thereby
completed.
Update Enables the updating of the modules connected to the LON bus.
LON-Modules Upd. v. USBStick : update of the module(s) via USB stick
Upd. v. Intern : update function via the onboard microSD card. The microSD card is
used for remote data transmission in combination with the NEW LIFT "Elevision" program
as an update buffer.
Attention! The update may take up to 30 minutes due to the number of LON modules.

5.9 MAIN MENU - Doors

For all menu items with adjustable numerical values, the value “0” corresponds to deactivation of the respective
function.

Menu item Description Setting

Doors-Basic Number of car doors 0 ... 3
  Number Doors
Doors-Basic The settings for the Doors-Selective menu item automatically apply YES
 Apply-ALL to all car doors. NO
Doors-Basic Delay between reaching the level position or the zone area and release 0 ... 4 s
Cam Delay of the retiring cam (locking solenoid for unlocking the shaft doors,
FSM-2 X6.5).
Doors-Basic Maximum allowed activation time of the locking solenoid. Prevents 0010 ...
  Cam Time Max damage to the solenoid in the event of faults. After this time has 9999 sec
elapsed, the locking solenoid output FSM-2 K4, K5 switches off in any
case (independent of the operating state of the controller).

130 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Doors

Menu item Description Setting

Doors-Basic Maximum wait time between closing of the car door contact and the 0 ... 65s
  Lock Delay shaft-door or bolt contact when closing the doors. If the wait time is
exceeded, the DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT error is displayed. The car door
opens for the Retry Time and then closes again.
Doors-Basic Maximum number of consecutive lock errors (DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT). 0 ... 10
  Lock Fail Max Afterwards, all car and landing calls are cleared and the DOOR LOCK
RETRY CNT error is displayed.
Doors-Basic Door assignment after lock error: ONE
  Lock Fail Open "One": only the last opened car door opens again after a lock error ALL
(DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT)
"All": all present car doors open after a lock error (DOOR LOCK
TIMEOUT)
Doors-Basic Delay between closing of the safety circuit and activation of the drive 0 ... 2.5s
  SCCT Debounce contactors when starting (prevents contactor bouncing)
Doors-Basic Opening time of the car door when attempting to close again after a 0 ... 4s
  Retry Time lock error (DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT).
Doors-Basic Delay before opening the doors after reaching the level position 0 ... 4s
  Open Delay (see „5.9.2 Door times diagram“ page 134).
Doors-Basic Delay before doors actually close. During the delay, the door status
  PreClose Delay displays "Closing".
To activate, either signal outputs on the FSM-2 K1/K6 relay or I/O ports
are available.
Doors-Basic The "Closing" status activates the K1/K6 relay on the FSM YES
  PreClos. O/P NO
Doors-Basic Shortens the door times if the CLOSE door button is actuated. YES
[Link]=OFF NO
Doors-Basic Delay when switching off the K20 safety circuit bypass relay. 0 ... 2s
  Bypass t-OFF
Doors-Basic Delay when switching on the K20 safety circuit bypass relay. 0.1 ... 2s
  Bypass t_ON
Doors-Basic Activate approach with open shaft and car doors. If the built-in safety YES
 Pre-Opening circuit bypass control is to be deactivated, the following steps are NO
necessary:
››Set Pre-Opening = NO
››Set Re-levelling = NO
Doors-Basic After an interruption of the photocell, the car wait time is shortened YES
 Fast-Closure so that the car door closes more quickly than without photocell NO
interruption.
Doors-Basic With car priority activated, the car door does not close until after the YES
 Prio-DC door close button on the car operating panel has been pressed. This NO
function prevents drives by unauthorised people with the priority key
switch activated. In the motor room, the door close signal can be simu-
lated by pressing the S button.
Doors-Basic FSM-2 K1 ("door-A") and FSM-2 K6 ("door B") are used as nudging YES
  Nudging Output outputs for door A and B. If the photocell is interrupted for longer than NO
the Doors-Selective - nudging time while the car door is open,
the door is closed with activated nudging output.
Doors-Basic Dependent on the "Doors-Selective Nudge Time" parameter. Door YES
 Nudge-Warnonly does not perform nudging (forced closure); instead, a message is NO
output via SAM or I/O port for a visual or acoustic signal.
Doors-Basic Active level of the FSM-2 X6.8, X10.8 photocell inputs NO
  I/P Photocell NO: closed function (photocell interrupted: 24 V on input, photocell NC
free: 0 V on input)
NC: open function (photocell interrupted: 0 V on input, photocell free:
24 V on input)
Doors-Basic Active level of the FSM-2 X6.6, X10.6 reversing contact inputs. NO
  I/P Reverse. Sw NO: closed function (reversing contact interrupted: 24 V on input, NC
reversing contact free: 0 V on input)
NC: open function (reversing contact interrupted: 0 V on input,
reversing contact free: 24 V on input)

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 131

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Doors

Menu item Description Setting

Doors-Basic Enable runtime monitoring DRM DOOR ERROR (shut down the installa- 0 ... 15
  Allow DRM-Door tion) after the number of door faults set here have occurred consecu-
tively (setting 0 ... 7). If the value +8 is added to the set value, a single
photocell error will also result in runtime monitoring. Prevents burning
out of unregulated door drives (see „8.1 Error messages“ page 161)
DRM–DOOR FAILURE.
Doors-Basic Activation of a self-monitoring safety curtain as car door replacement. YES
 SS-Curtain Here, the self-monitoring is performed by the door relay of the FSM NO
and the safety circuit monitoring function of the controller.
Doors-Basic Duration of the light curtain test pulse that is output by the door relay of 0 ... 10s
 SS-CurtainWait the FSM before each drive.
Doors-Basic For performing two separate light curtain test runs for two door sides YES
  SS-Curtain A+B NO
Doors-Basic Extended open hold time of the car door after a disabled call on the 0 ... 255s
 WheelchairTime landing call panel.
Doors-Basic Is there a separate locking solenoid present for each door side that YES
 Selective-Cams must be controlled separately (selectively)? NO
YES: each door side has a separate locking solenoid that is controlled
selectively via FSM-2 X8
NO: The locking solenoids of all door sides are controlled in parallel via
FSM-2 X8
Doors-Basic Method of controlling the locking solenoid for the case of automatic car 0
  Door-Lock Type doors and manual shaft doors 1
(see „5.9.1 Door-Lock Types“ page 133). 2
Doors-Basic Delay between door closing and door lock. 0.0 - 5.0s
  Door-Lock Del.
Doors-Selective Car door type: all common car doors are supported.
 Type
Doors-Selective Opening time of the car door without end switch. 0 ... 20s
  Opening Time The opening time of car doors without end switches should be meas-
ured as exactly as possible and entered here.
Doors-Selective Car doors where the door leaves can be decoupled. If this parameter is YES
 Decoupling activated, the controller uses the door end switches and safety circuit NO
to detect whether the door leaves are decoupled and tries to recouple
the door leaves by repeatedly opening the door. Parameter can only be
activated with connected door end switches.
Doors-Selective Maximum number of re-coupling attempts for decoupled door leaves 0 ... 10
  Decouple Max. before all calls are cleared (only relevant if Decoupling=YES)
Doors-Selective Shaft doors are manual doors. The door-C input of the safety circuit is YES
  Manual Door used for querying the manual door contacts (display: MANUAL DOOR NO
OPEN)
Doors-Selective Debounce time of the manual door contacts. Parameter prevents "flut- 0 ... 5 sec
  -"- debounce tering" of the locking solenoid output when starting due to bouncing
manual door contacts.
Doors-Selective Car door has end switches. YES
  Endswitches ››YES: connect car door end switches to FSM-2 X6 and X10. Set NO
Opening time to 20 s
››NO: the end switch inputs on the FSM-2 X6 and X10 are not needed,
opening time = actually required opening time of the car door
(see „5.5.10 [Link]-Security“ page 114)
(see „5.9.2 Door times diagram“ page 134).
Note jumpers J21, J31, J71, J81 on the FSM-2
(see „4.3.2 Jumpers“ page 62).
Doors-Selective Open hold time of the doors without car calls or landing calls. Param- 2 ... 250 sec
  Open Hold Tim eter is only effective if there no further calls are pending. The open hold
time of the car doors with pending calls is determined with Min. wait
car / landing (see „5.9.2 Door times diagram“ page 134)
Doors-Selective Open hold time of the car door after a reversing cycle. 0.0 ... 20.0 sec
  Reversing Tim

132 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Doors

Menu item Description Setting

Doors-Selective Car door is not powered in the OPEN end position (no OPEN signal). YES
 Deenergize NO
Doors-Selective Delay when switching the door relay (from door open to door closed 0.1 ... 2.0 sec
  Change Delay and vice versa). Parameter prevents short circuits due to excessively
fast switching when using AC doors.
Doors-Selective Time before the start of nudging (forced closure) with permanently 0 ... 300 sec
  Nudge Time  interrupted photocell. Nudging ignores the photocell signal and can
take place in two ways:
››with activated nudging output (that reduces the closing speed at the
door controller) if Nudging Output=YES is set
››pulse-shaped if Nudging Output=NO and the pulse duration is set
under nudging
Doors-Selective Minimum wait time of the car on a floor after arrival following a landing 0 ... 60 sec
  [Link] Land  call (see „5.9.2 Door times diagram“ page 134).
Doors-Selective Minimum wait time of the car on a floor after arrival following a car call 0 ... 60 sec
  [Link] Car  (see „5.9.2 Door times diagram“ page 134).

5.9.1 Door-Lock Types

Setting Control method
0 Standard method:
››When approaching the floor, the locking solenoid releases immediately after reaching the level
position and after the cam delay elapses. The manual shaft door can be opened even as the
car door opens.
››The locking solenoid does not re-activate until the car door is completely closed. The manual
shaft door can be opened while the car door closes, causing the car door to reverse.
1 "Austria" method:
››When approaching the floor, the locking solenoid does not release until the car door is
completely open. The manual shaft door cannot be opened as the car door opens.
››The locking solenoid activates as soon as the car door begins to close. The manual shaft door
can no longer be opened while the car door closes.
2 "Inverted" method
››Doors are always locked.
››The locking solenoid is activated on the floor to unlock the doors and releases again when the
doors close.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 133

Menu tree
MAIN MENU - Doors

5.9.2 Door times diagram

Open hold time

Open delay
Cam delay

Min. wait landing / car

Opening time

1 2 3 4 5 time

1 Car has reached level position, drive has stopped (resp. car has reached door zone)
2 Car door(s) start opening
3 Car door is fully open (the opening time should be adjusted to 20sec. for doors with limit switches)
4 Car door starts closing again, if there are further calls
5 Car door starts closing again, if there are no further calls

Fig. 5.7: Door times of the FST controller

134 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Menu tree
TEST MENU

5.10 TEST MENU

Menu item Description Setting range
Fault Reset Reset runtime errors that caused the system to stop. All error YES
messages that begin with DRM- shut down the installation (error NO
LED illuminates permanently). The shutdown can be reset by
performing a fault reset.
Doors-LOCK Lock or unlock car doors (during maintenance work). Locked car Lock
doors are marked with an X after the door letter on line C of the Unlock
FST display (see „3.2.4 Line C – Status messages“ page 27).
The door lock is retained even after switching the controller off
and on.
Test drive ON Place calls using the FST keypad. While the test drive is ON
switched on, Target= ... appears on OFF
line C of the display; use the £/¢ buttons to select a target floor.
Execute the call with E.
Auto Test Drv ON/OFF Trigger automatically generated car calls (MAIN MENU / ON
Config / Auto Test Drive). The activated test drive is OFF
acknowledged with a T on line C of the FST display.
Service Mode ON/OFF In service mode, external error messages are suppressed (e.g., ON
collective error message). The service mode is acknowledged OFF
with SERVICE MODE on line B of the FST display.
Endswitch Test Top Slow travel to the top emergency end switch. YES
This test cannot be started from the top floor! NO
Endswitch Test Bot Slow travel to the bottom emergency end switch. YES
This test cannot be started from the bottom floor! NO
V-Mon. Test Top Test deceleration monitoring at top. YES
This test only functions if deceleration monitoring is activated! NO
This test cannot be started from the top floor!
V-Mon. Test Bot. Test deceleration monitoring at bottom. YES
This test only functions if deceleration monitoring is activated! NO
This test cannot be started from the bottom floor!
DRM Test Test of runtime monitoring. YES
2 sec after starting the drive, an encoder error is simulated by NO
stopping position detection.
This test can be started from the top or bottom floor.
Buffer Test Up Drive with the nominal speed to the counterweight buffer. YES
This test can cause damages to the car. NO
This test cannot be started from the top floor!
After starting the test with YES, the E button must remain
pressed down until the buffer is reached (dead man operation).
Buffer Test Down Drive with the nominal speed to the car buffer. This test can YES
cause damage to the car and should only be performed after NO
consulting NEW LIFT. This test cannot be started from the
bottom floor!
After starting the test with YES, the E button must remain
pressed down until the buffer is reached (dead man operation).
UCM-A3 Test Up UCM-A3 test drive in upward direction. Simulation of a UCM
situation (open door) by relay K90.1 and movement of the car by
controlling the nominal speed.
UCM-A3 test Down UCM-A3 test drive in downward direction. Simulation of a UCM
situation (open door) by relay K90.1 and movement of the car by
controlling the nominal speed.
UCM-A3 Test Act. Ten test drives are performed for the function check of self-
monitoring with A3 actuators (e.g., holding brake or valves).
After a successful test, the message A3 ACTUATOR TEST OK!
appears. See "UCM-A3" manual

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 135

Menu tree
TEST MENU

Menu item Description Setting range

UCM-A3 Fault Reset Reset of the UMC-A3 errors. Error 66 "DRM UCM-A3 ERROR"
and 67 "DRM A3 DRIVE ERROR" can only be reset using this
menu item. The regular "fault reset" as well as switching the
controller OFF/ON has no effect on the UCM-A3 errors. See
"UCM-A3" manual.
Brake Measurmt. ON/OFF See System description - Braking distance counters
Safety Gear Autom. Activation of the automatic arrest test. Arrest floor and offset are
to be set under Main Menu/Config/Installation/. After
activation, keep "" pressed down. Activation of the speed-
limiter remote triggering solenoids takes place on the preset
floor.
Safety Gear Manual
Immediate activation of the arrest test by pressing the 
button.
Safety Gear Reset Immediate reset of the speed-limiter remote triggering solenoids
or reset solenoids by pressing the  button.

136 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
General

6 Programmable I/O ports

The FST controller has 80 programmable I/O ports. Eight I/O ports are located directly on the FST circuit boards
(X1.4 .. X1.11) and are always available. Seven other I/O ports are located on the FSM-2 (72 ... 78). The remai-
ning 65 I/O ports are located at arbitrary positions on the LON bus on so-called “Remote I/O Modules” (RIO-
ADM or RIO-FPM).

6.1 General
Characteristics of a programmable input/output:
››Assigned function: each I/O port can be assigned a function directly on-site via the FST menu.
››Signal direction: The signal direction of the I/O ports is subdivided into input and output functions.
››Active level (GND): all ports can be inverted via programming.

Input functions
The input function is triggered as soon as the state on the I/O port changes from the inactive level to the active
level.

Output functions
As soon as the condition of the output function is satisfied, the state on the I/O port changes from the inactive
level to the active level.

Flags
The “Flag” function holds a special position. Various control states can be linked in a flag with “OR”. The I/O port
becomes active as soon as at least one of the required conditions is met.

Signals
Like the Flag function, the “Signals” function can link and output control states. Here, however, door car states
are “AND” linked. The I/O port becomes active as soon as all required conditions are met.

User-defined error messages

The FST controller permits the output of freely selectable error messages/event messages. Any given error
message that is made available by the FST software can thereby be assigned to a programmable I/O port. This
allows user-defined error states to be communicated to the outside.

Programming
The I/O ports are programmed in the FST menu under MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O Configuration.
The following submenus are available:

Submenu Meaning
I/O ports Assign the program function to the I/O port via the RAW register. Ports Port[0] ..
Port[79] are programmable
I/O Flags Programming of up to eight flags that represent an "OR" link of various pieces of control
functions.
I/O Error Selection of up to three error messages from the entire error list. The selected error messages
are stored as USER ERROR[0] .. USER ERROR[2].

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 137

Programmable I/O ports
Bit calculation

Setting the RAW register

The RAW register is an eight-digit hexadecimal value that encodes a 32-bit register. Via the setting of the RAW
register, the corresponding terminal can be assigned a function from the function table (see „6.4 I/O functions“
page 140). Furthermore, the active level, the signal direction and the function parameters are set in the RAW
register.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

6.2 Bit calculation

All ports of the FST can be programmed with the help of the bits. The register can include 8, 16 or 32 bits. The
settings are entered in the controller as hexadecimal value.
The 32-bit registers are structured as follows:

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Digit 1: bit 0 - 3
Digit 2: bit 4 - 7
Digit 3: bit 8-11
Digit 4: bit 12-15
Digit 5: bit 16-19
Digit 6: bit 20-23
Digit 7: bit 24-27
Digit 8: bit 28-31
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0: Active level of the input/output

Bit 1: Input
Bit 2: Output
Bit 3-7: Function number
Bit 8-31: Function parameter

Fig. 6.1: Structure of the 32-bit register

A hexadecimal-encoded byte is decoded digit by digit. Each digit has a separate decimal value that is calculated
as follows:

0 6 1 f 9 a 2 5
0+0+0+0 0+4+2+0 0+0+0+1 8+4+2+1 8+0+0+1 8+0+2+0 0+0+2+0 0+4+0+1
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Digit 1: bit 0 - 3
Digit 2: bit 4 - 7
Digit 3: bit 8 - 11
Digit 4: bit 12 - 15
Digit 5: bit 16 - 19
Digit 6: bit 20 - 23
Digit 7: bit 24 - 27
Digit 8: bit 28 - 31

Fig. 6.2: Conversion of binary values to hexadecimal values.

138 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
Programmable I/O ports

The following table contains all values relevant to the FST in hex, decimal, binary and Gray code.

Hexadecimal value Decimal value Binary value Gray Code

0 0 0000 0000
1 1 0001 0001
2 2 0010 0011
3 3 0011 0010
4 4 0100 0110
5 5 0101 0111
6 6 0110 0101
7 7 0111 0100
8 8 1000 1100
9 9 1001 1101
a 10 1010 1111
b 11 1011 1110
c 12 1100 1010
d 13 1101 1011
e 14 1110 1001
f 15 1111 1000

6.3 Programmable I/O ports

Input/Output Terminal
RAW [0] FST: X1.4
RAW [1] FST: X1.5
RAW [2] FST: X1.6
RAW [3] FST: X1.7
RAW [4] FST: X1.8
RAW [5] FST: X1.9
RAW [6] FST: X1.10
RAW [7] FST: X1.11
RAW [8]...[72] I/O ports of external RIO modules at an arbi-
trary location on the LON bus.
RAW [73] FSM-2 X24.2
RAW [74] FSM-2 X24.3
RAW [75] FSM-2 X24.4
RAW [76] FSM-2 X24.5
RAW [77] FSM-2 X24.6
RAW [78] FSM-2 X24.7
RAW [79] FSM-2 X24.8

Active level

Bit 0 Description
1 + 24 V (only possible with inputs)
0 GND

The active level of an output is always to be selected with GND since the open-collector output can only switch
the required currents in this state.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 139

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Input/Output

Bit 1 & 2 Description

00 No function
01 Input
10 Output
11 Input/Output

6.4 I/O functions

The following table contains all functions that can be assigned to a RAW register with their function number.
Under the “RAW Value” column, you will find the last two digits of the RAW values from the Config / I/O-
Configuration / I/O-Ports menu item.

RAW value RAW value inverted Input/Output Description

xxxxxx0A xxxxxx0B Input Landing call (see page 141)
xxxxxx12 xxxxxx13 Input Fire signal (see page 142)
xxxxxx1A xxxxxx1B Input Remote shutdown
xxxxxx22 xxxxxx23 Input Landing priority (see page 142)
xxxxxx2A xxxxxx2B Input Drive inhibit
xxxxxx34 xxxxxx35 Output Position indicator (see page 143)
xxxxxx3A xxxxxx3B Input Door open button (see page 144)
xxxxxx42 xxxxxx43 Input Door close button (see page 144)
xxxxxx6A xxxxxx6B Input Overload
xxxxxx72 xxxxxx73 Input Full load
xxxxxx7C xxxxxx7D Output Flag (see page 144)
xxxxxx84 xxxxxx85 Output Signal (see page 148)
xxxxxx8A xxxxxx8B Input Landing control OFF
xxxxxx92 xxxxxx93 Input Service
xxxxxx9A xxxxxx9B Input Evacuation (see page 150)
xxxxxxA2 xxxxxxA3 Input Forced stop
xxxxxxAA xxxxxxAB Input Special drive (see page 150)
xxxxxxB4 xxxxxxB5 Output Emergency call misuse (see page 151)
xxxxxxBC xxxxxxBD Output Speed threshold (see page 152)
xxxxxxC2 xxxxxxC3 Input DRM I/O Port (see page 152)
xxxxxxCA xxxxxxCB Input Destination call (see page 153)
xxxxxxD2 xxxxxxD3 Input Ramp drive (see page 153)
xxxxxxDA xxxxxxDB Input Emergency end switch
xxxxxxE2 xxxxxxE3 Input Activate VIP mode
xxxxxxEA xxxxxxEB Input Bypass floor blocking (see page 153)
xxxxxxF2 xxxxxxF3 Input Special (in-plant special functions)
xxxxxxFA xxxxxxFB Input Block floor (see page 154)

140 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Functions without additional parameters

The following table shows the values to be set in the RAW register for all functions without function
parameters.

Function Input/Output Raw register

Remote shutdown Input 0000001A
Overload Input 0000006A
Full load Input 00000072
Landing control OFF Input 0000008A
Service Input 00000092
Forced stop Input 000000A2
Emergency call misuse Output 000000B4
Drive inhibit Input 0000002A

6.4.1 Function “landing call”

The “landing call” function allows a landing call to be set via the terminal of a programmable input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS menu item and set the I/O port
that is to be configured.

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
00000000000
Bit 0 - 7: Bit pattern for landing call button 0000 1010 = 0A
Bit 7 - 13: Floor; e
Bit 14 - 15: Door side (0 ...2); t
Bit 16 - 17: Direction (0=Down, 1=Up, 2=Stop); r
Bit 18: Bus (0 ...7); b

Fig. 6.3: Landing call function

Examples

Function Raw register

Floor 0, door side A, up direction, bus 0 0001000A
Floor 1, door side A, down direction, bus 0 0000010A
Floor 2, door side A, up direction, bus 0 0001020A
Floor 5, door side B, down direction, bus 1 0005450A
Floor 15, door side A, stop direction, bus 2 000A0F0A

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 141

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.2 Function “fire signal”

The “fire signal” function enables the triggering of a fireman mode evacuation drive using the terminal of a pro-
grammable input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu time and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for fire signal 0001 0010 = 12

Bit 8-13: Floor; e
Bit 16: Smoke detector; r
Bit 17: Fire recall reset (SIA standard); b

Fig. 6.4: Fire signal function

Examples

Function Raw register

Floor 0, smoke detector - no 00000012
Floor 1, smoke detector - yes 00010112
Floor 5, smoke detector - no 00000512
Floor 15, smoke detector - yes 00010F12
Floor 20, smoke detector - no 00001412

6.4.3 Function “landing priority”

The “landing priority” function enables the triggering of a priority landing drive via the terminal of a programma-
ble input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for landing priority 0010 0010 = 22

Bit 8-13: Floor; e
Bit 14-15: Door side (0 ...2); t
Bit 16: Safety priority; s
Bit 20-22: FST-ID 0 ...7; i (must be specified for groups!)

Fig. 6.5. Landing priority function

Examples

Function Raw register

Floor 0, door side A 00000022
Floor 1, door side B 00004122
Floor 5, door side C 00008522
Floor 15, door side A 00000F22
Floor 22, door side B 00005622

142 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.4 Function “position indicator”

The “position indicator” function enables the output of a bit of the encoded position indicator signal at a terminal
of a programmable input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for position indicator 0011 0100 = 34

Bit 8-10: Position indicator bit; b
Bit 11: Output code; a
0: HEX-Code 1:GRAY-Code
Bit 12: Floor range mode; B
Bit 13: Use positions of pseudo floors as
threshold values; P (see example)
Bit 14: Floor counting method; z (HEX code only)
0: 0...n 1: 1...n+1
Bit 16-21: Lower floor threshold; e
Bit 24-29: Upper floor threshold; E

Fig. 6.6: Position indicator function

Floor range mode

Function with which the output is switched between the bottom and top threshold floor. To activate the mode, set
bit 12 to “1”.
When using multiple outputs with position indicator in floor range mode, the position indicator bit of the outputs
must be different in order to ensure correct function.

Pseudo floor
Instead of the actual floors, height values can also be specified as threshold value. The height values must be
defined as pseudo floors (Positioning / Pseudo Floors). Up to eight pseudo floors can be set in the
FST. To use pseudo floors as threshold value, set bit 13 to “1” and then enter the corresponding pseudo floors
as floor threshold value for bits 16-21 and 24-29.

Examples

Function Raw register

Position indicator bit 0, GRAY code 00000834
Position indicator bit 1, GRAY code 00000934
Position indicator bit 2, GRAY code 00000A34
Position indicator bit 2, HEX code 00000334
Floor range mode switches the output between floor 3 and 8 08031034
Pseudo floors: output switches between 3400mm (pseudo floor 3) and 9800mm 04033034
(pseudo floor 4)
Floor counting method HEX code 1...n+1 instead of 0...n 00004

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 143

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.5 Function “door open button”

Has the same function as the door open button on the car operating panel. Application examples include, e.g.,
door open buttons on the car roof or in the control cabinet for setting and manually moving doors.

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for door OPEN button 0011 1010 = 3A
Bit 8-13: Floor; e
Bit 14-15: Door (00=A, 01=B, 10=C); t
Bit 16: Only if car on selected floor; E
Bit 17: Ignore if doors close; i
Bit 18: 0=opens if door already open;o
1=always open

Fig. 6.7: Door open button function

6.4.6 Function “door close button”

Has the same function as the door close button on the car operating panel. Application examples include, e.g.,
door close buttons on the car roof for setting and manually moving doors.

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for door CLOSE button 0100 0010 = 42
Bit 8-13: Floor; e
Bit 14-15:Door (00=A, 01=B, 10=C); t

Fig. 6.8: Door close button function

6.4.7 Function “flag”

The “flag” function enables the activation of a terminal of a programmable input/output in the event of a certain
condition. The condition is an “OR” link of various controller states. The condition can be debounced or output
with a time delay via a control parameter.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for flag 0111 1100 = 7C

Bit 8 - 11: Flag number (0 ... 15); f

Fig. 6.9: Flag function

144 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

RAW values of the flag functions

Function Raw register

Flag 0 0000007C
Flag 1 0000017C
Flag 2 0000027C
Flag 3 0000037C
Flag 4 0000047C
Flag 5 0000057C
Flag 6 0000067C
Flag 7 0000077C
Flag 8 0000087C
Flag 9 0000097C
Flag 10 00000A7C
Flag 11 00000B7C
Flag 12 00000C7C
Flag 13 00000D7C
Flag 14• 00000E7C
Flag 15• 00000F7C

•Flags 14 and 15 are occupied internally by NEW LIFT for modem and fax.

Setting flags
Available in the FST menu are 16 flags that correspond to an “OR” link of any given controller states in the
following table.
Select the MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O FLAGS / MASK menu item and set the
flag[0..15] that is to be configured (S+£).
The MASK parameter is an eight-digit hexadecimal value that encodes a 32-bit register.
The sum of the selected flag functions yields the MASK parameter value. The hexadecimal values of the table
are added to the definition of the flag parameter digit-by-digit.
To enable the configured flag, it is absolutely necessary that bit 0 be set to “1” in the MAIN MENU / CONFIG /
I/O Configuration / I/O Flags / CTRL parameter, (see „Setting flag control“ page 147).

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 145

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Flag function Description Value (hexadecimal)

Normal operation Controller runs in normal operation 00000001
Controller stopped Shut down by FST menu 00000002
Emergency stop Emergency stop was triggered 00000004
Inspection mode Controller is in inspection mode 00000008
Auxiliary mode control Auxiliary mode control active 00000010
Runtime monitoring Motor monitoring triggered and shut down the 00000020
FST controller
Fire mode Fire signal was reported 00000040
Fireman mode Controller is in fireman mode 00000080
Overload Overload was reported 00000100
Full load Full load was reported 00000200
Remote shutdown The controller has been remotely switched off 00000400
Car priority Controller is in car priority mode 00000800
Landing priority Controller is in landing priority mode 00001000
Landing control OFF Landing control OFF is activated 00002000
Calibration / learn drive Calibration or learn drive is being performed 00004000
Evacuation The controller is in evacuation mode 00008000
Orientation mode Controller is in orientation mode 00010000
VIP mode The controller is in VIP mode 00020000
Installation mode Controller is in installation mode 00040000
Apron extended Apron is extended 00080000
Maintenance necessary A service counter (motor hours, drives and doors) 00100000
has counted down to the minimum value
Power supply insufficient The minimum supply voltage of +17 V is not met 00200000
Return Park drive to the bottom floor (with hydraulic lifts) 00400000
Park Drive Park drive according to the set program 00800000
parameters
Service The lift system is being serviced, the function of 01000000
the error list is suppressed
Self-test The FST performs a self-test 02000000
End switch test A test drive to the top or bottom end limit was 04000000
triggered
User error 0 First user-defined error has occurred (see „Func- 08000000
tion “user error”“ page 147)
User error 1 Second user-defined error has occurred 10000000
User error 2 Third user-defined error has occurred 20000000
Send fax report A fax report is currently being sent 40000000
NEW LIFT internal 80000000

Examples

Flag functions MASK

"Emergency stop" OR "runtime monitoring" (error message output) 00000024
"Inspection" or "auxiliary mode" 00000018
"Fire signal" OR "fireman service" OR "remote shutdown" OR "car priority" OR 00001CC0
"landing priority"
"Maintenance necessary" 00100000
"Return" OR "park drive" 00C00000

146 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Setting lag time or debounce value

The output of the controller states set under Flag can be performed with a time delay or debounced. Select
the MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O FLAGS / DELAY menu item and set the
flag[0...15] that is to be configured (S+£).
According to the debounce type selected in the MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O Configuration / I/O
Flags / CTRL. menu item, bit 1, set seconds or switching operations.

Setting flag control

With the flag control register, the corresponding flag can be enabled or blocked. Also defined here is whether
the flag output is to occur with a time delay or debounced.
Select the MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O FLAGS / CTRL menu item and set the
flag[0...15] that is to be configured (S+£).
The flag control is a two-digit hexadecimal value that encodes an 8-bit register.

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0: Enable (0=flag locked, 1=flag enabled) bit 0 - 3

Bit 1: Unlocking type (0=switching operations, 1=time delay)
Bit 2: No output of the flag function in service mode
Bit 3-6:Not assigned
Bit 7: Stop PC-card recording (0=deactivated, 1=activated)

Fig. 6.10: Control function

Examples

Function DELAY CTRL

Flag enabled, output 3x debounced 03 01
Flag enabled, output delayed by 20 seconds 20 03

Function “user error”

The “user error” function enables the output of an error message from the error list at a terminal of a program-
mable input/output. If the selected error message occurs, the second part of the FST display displays USER
ERROR [0..2]. Via the “user error” flag function, the state can be output on a terminal.
Three user errors are available in the MAIN MENU / CONFIG / I/O Configuration / I/O Error menu
item (ERROR[0] .. ERROR[2]).

Setting the ID
With the S+£ button combination, set the user error ERROR[0..2] that is to be configured and select an error
message from the error list under ID:.

Setting Ctrl
The value to be entered is a hexadecimal value that decodes a byte. The first bit enables the error, the last five
bits determine the output duration (DDDDDxxF). The duration of the output signal can be set in 5 s increments
(max. 160 s).

Value to be entered Function

01 User error enabled
09 User error enabled; display duration: 5 s
11 User error enabled; display duration: 10 s
19 User error enabled; display duration: 15 s

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 147

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.8 Function “signal”

The “signal” function enables the output of an “AND” link of various controller-internal signals at a terminal of a
programmable input/output. A maximum of 16 ports can be occupied with signals.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

Examples

Function Raw register

"Floor 5" AND "Level" AND "Door A open" 00244584
"Door A closed" AND "Door B closed" 00018084
"Car call pressed (pulse)" 02000084
"Floor 15" AND "Landing call pressed (pulse)" 04004F84
"Post-Emergency stop" AND "Car calls blocked" 18000084
"Safety circuit error" 20000084
"Evacuation ended" 40000084
"Floor 1" AND "Flag 0 active" 80004184

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for signal output 1000 0100 = 84

Bit 8-12: Floor; e
Bit 13: Individual signal mode; s
Bit 14: Enable of floor signal; F
Bit 15: Door A closed; a
Bit16: Door B closed; b
Bit 17: Door C closed; c
Bit 18: Door A open; A
Bit 19: Door B open; b
Bit 20: Door C open; c
Bit 21: Level signal; l
Bit 22: In-drive signal; i
Bit 23: UP direction signal; r
Bit 24: DOWN direction signal; R
Bit 25: Car call pressed (pulse); g
Bit 26: Landing call pressed (pulse); G
Bit 27: Landing calls blocked; x
Bit 28: Car calls blocked, X
Bit 29: Safety circuit error; S
Bit 30: Evacuation ended; E
Bit 31: Flag 0 active; O

Fig. 6.11: Signal function

All signals activated with “1” are linked with “AND” and output at the selected output. If the floor signal is enab-
led (bit 14 = 1), then all activated signals refer exclusively to the set floor (bit 8 ... 13).

Individual signals
A number of additional individual signals are available. These can only be applied to all floors simultaneously. To
activate the individual signal mode, set bit 13=1 and bit 14=0. The function numbers of the individual signals are
then encoded with bits 8... 12.

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for signal output 1000 0100 = 84

Bit 8-12: Function number of the individual signals; e
Bit 13: Individual signal mode; s
Bit 14: Enabling of the floor signal; F = 0

Fig. 6.12: Functions of the bits with individual signals

148 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Individual signal Function number Description

Ramp drive 0000 2184 Output during ramp drive
Fireman mode evacuation drive 0000 2284 Output if evacuation drive is completed
completed
Car door A closing 0000 2384 Output while door A is closing
Car door B closing 0000 2484 Output while door B is closing
Car door C closing 0000 2584 Output while door C is closing
Fire signal or fireman mode (SIA) 0000 2684 Output during fire signal or fireman mode
Fire siren active (EN-81-72) 0000 2784 Output if siren active
Nudging 0000 2884 Output during nudging
Anti creep device solenoid 0000 2984 Output while the anti creep device solenoid
activates
SuperPrio mode active 0000 2A84 Output while SuperPrio mode is active
Car occupied 0000 2B84 Output if calls are pending or manual door is open
Emerg.-call pressed 0000 2C84 Output while emergency call is output
Car free 0000 2D84 Output if no departure direction, no calls, doors
closed, door times elapsed
Remote I/O function 00nn 2E84 Output if corresponding input is active
nn=port number
DRM selective 00nn 2F84 To be able to obtain individual error messages,
nn=DRM-ID DRM errors can be selected individually
Light curtain interrupted 0000 3084 Output if light curtain is interrupted
Doors open 0000 3184 Output if one of the doors is open
Remote shutdown ended 0000 3284 Output if remote shutdown was ended
Ventilator 0000 3384 Output while car ventilator is active
Chime 0000 3484 Output during arrival chime signal
ADMSS 0000 3584 Remote output that is controlled by the ADM or
EAZ-256
Loading mode 20s 0000 3684 Output if loading mode will end in less than 20s
Car empty 00003784 Output if there is an empty load
Prog. timer SSss 3884 Programmable timer output. Additional information
SS=end time in the FST history (from V1. 100-0422, 29.02.08)
ss=start time
ESM mode active 0000 3984 Output during ESM mode
Door A opening 0000 3A84 Output while door A is opening
Door B opening 0000 3B84 Output while door B is opening
Door C opening 0000 3C84 Output while door C is opening
Loading mode 0000 3D84 Output as long as loading mode is active
Pulse mode 0000 3E84 NEW LIFT internal
Manual door open 0000 3F84 Output as long as manual door is open
Photocell/reversing switch blocked 0000 6084 Output if photocell or reversing switch are blocked
>= 20s for more than 20s.
Fireman mode, doors closing 0000 6184 Output while doors closing in event of fire

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 149

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.9 Function “evacuation”

The “evacuation” function enables the triggering of an evacuation drive via the terminal of a programmable
input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for evacuation function 1001 1010 = 9A

Bit 8-13: Evacuation floor; E
Bit 14: Evacuation to next possible floor; n
Bit 16-19:Evacuation speed; v
Bit 20: Enable of evacuation speed; f
Bit 21-23:Door state after ending the evacuation drive; t
Bit 24: Regulator-supported evacuation; r
Bit 25-27:Intermediate-stop floor; z
Bit 28: Water penetration in shaft pit; w
Bit 29: Evacuation "Hold" mode; h
Bit 30: Bypass evacuation floor (bits 8-13); u

Fig. 6.13: Evacuation function

Evacuation speed (bits 16-19)

0 = V1 4 = V5 9 = Vi
1 = V2 5 = V6 10 = Vr
2 = V3 6 = V7 11 = Vn
3 = V4 7 = V8 12 = drive decides independently

Door state (bits 21-23)

0 = open all doors and leave open 4 = only open and leave open door B
1 = leave all doors closed 5 = only open and then close door B
2 = only open and leave open door A 7 = open door A & B, then close
3 = only open door A, then close

Examples

Function Raw register

Evacuation floor 0, evacuation speed = automatic, open all doors following evacuation 0000009A
Closest evacuation floor, evacuation speed = automatic, open all doors following 0000409A
evacuation
Closes evacuation floor, evacuation speed = V1, do not open doors following 0020409A
evacuation

6.4.10 Function “special drive”

The “special drive” function enables the triggering of a special drive via the terminal of a programmable input/
output. Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and
set the I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).
8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for special drive 1010 1010 = AA

Bit 8-13: Target floor; E
Bit 16: Release locked floors; a
Bit 17: Direction of travel indicator suppressed; f
Bit 18: Open the first available car door; t
Bit 19: Special drive as "return"; r
Bit 20: Special drive as "park drive"; p
Bit 21: Change of direction allowed; w
Bit 22: Special drive at set speed; v
Bit 23: Target floor = pseudo floor; P
Bit 24-26: Car door to be opened; o
Bit 27-30: Special drive speed; V

Fig. 6.14: Special drive function

150 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Car door (bits 24-26)

0 = door A 2 = door C
1 = door B 4 = none

Door state (bits 21-23)

0 = V1 4 = V5 9 = Vi
1 = V2 5 = V6 10 = Vr
2 = V3 6 = V7 12 = Vn
3 = V4 7 = V8

Examples

Function Raw register

Target floor 1, open first available door 002401AA
Target floor 0, park drive, suppress direction of travel indicator, do not open any doors 041200AA

6.4.11 Function “emergency call misuse”

The “emergency call misuse” function enables the control of a relay which can be connected in series with the
emergency call button (or emergency call forwarding) in order suppress unjustified emergency calls.
The relay always activates if:
››the car is moving (without fault)
››the car is level on a floor with open car door
››the emergency call button was pressed for less than the adjustable delay
Emergency calls cannot be placed until the relay has released!
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for emergency call misuse 1011 0100 = B4
Bit 8-15: Lag time in seconds (0 - 255s); z
Bit 16: Ignore door status; t

Fig. 6.15: Emergency call misuse

Examples

Function Raw register

Emergency call misuse, delay 10 sec 00000AB4
Emergency call misuse, delay 20 sec 000014B4

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 151

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.12 Function “speed threshold”

The “speed threshold” function enables the output of a signal indicating a speed that is below the minimum limit
at a terminal of a programmable input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for speed threshold 1011 1100 = BC

Bit 8-23: Speed threshold in mm/s; v
Bit 24: Output only active if lift moving; a

Fig. 6.16: Speed threshold function

Calculation
The speed value must be entered in the RAW register in hexadecimal form. The conversion from decimal to
hexadecimal value is performed recursively, digit-by-digit, until the decimal value < 16:
››Digit 1 = integer remainder with (decimal value / 16)
››New decimal value = (old decimal value - integer remainder) / 16
››Digit 2 = integer remainder with (new decimal value / 16)
››New decimal value = (old decimal value - integer remainder) / 16

Example
Speed value = 300 mm/s
››Digit 1 = integer remainder with (300 / 16) = 12 = “C”
››New decimal value = (300 - 12) / 16 = 18
››Digit 2 = integer remainder with (18 / 16) = 2 = “2”
››New decimal value = (18 - 2) / 16 = “1”
››Digit 3 = “1”
=> RAW register = 00012CBC

6.4.13 Function “DRM I/O Port”

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
UR I V 0 0 s S z z z z z z z z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z
Bit 0-7: Bit pattern of DRM-I/O-port 1100 0010 = C2
Bit 8-15: Max. release time of the anti creep device; Z
Bit 16-23: Max. activation time of the anti creep device; z
Bit 24: Release monitoring of the anti creep device; S
Bit 25: Activation monitoring of the anti creep device; s
Bit 28: "Pre-Opening mode"; V
Bit 29: Anti creep device does not activate in inspection drive; I
Bit 30: Anti creep device does not activate in return drive; R
Bit 31: Anti creep device does not activate with active
door bypass; U

Fig. 6.17: DRM I/O port function

152 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

6.4.14 Function “destination call”

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for destination call 1100 1010 = CA

Bit 8-13: Collection floor; a
Bit 14-15: Collection door; A
Bit 16-21: Target floor; z
Bit 22-23: Target door; Z

Fig. 6.18: Destination call function

6.4.15 Function “ramp drive”

The “ramp drive” function enables the provision of the inputs on the terminal of a programmable input/output
that are necessary during a ramp drive.
The ramp drive enables the controlled movement of the car in dead man control with completely opened car
door within an expanded door zone. Four inputs are necessary for this purpose:
››Activate ramp drive
››UP button (dead man)
››DOWN button (dead man)
››OPEN door end switch of the car doorSelect the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O
PORTS / RAW menu item and set the I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for ramp drive 1101 0010 = D2

Bit 8-11:Bit 8-11:function number; f

Fig. 6.19: Ramp drive function

Setting the four inputs

Function Raw register

Activate ramp drive 0000 03D2
Ramp drive, UP button 0000 01D2
Ramp drive, DOWN button 0000 02D2
Ramp drive, OPEN door end switch 0000 04D2

6.4.16 Function “bypass floor locking”

The “bypass floor locking” function enables the cancellation of floor locking through the terminal of a program-
mable input/output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for bypassing floor locking 1110 1010 = EA
Bit 8: Bypass floor locking for car call button; i
Bit 9: Bypass floor locking for landing call button; a

Fig. 6.20: Bypass floor locking function

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 153

Programmable I/O ports
I/O functions

Examples

Function Raw register

Bypass floor locking for car call 0000 01EA
Bypass floor locking for landing call 0000 02EA
Bypass floor locking for car and landing call 0000 03EA

6.4.17 Function “block floors”

The “block floors” function enables the dynamic blocking of floors using the terminal of a programmable input/
output.
Select the MAIN MENU/ CONFIG / I/O CONFIGURATION / I/O PORTS / RAW menu item and set the
I/O port that is to be configured (S+£).

8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1

Bit 0-7: Bit pattern for floor blocking 1111 1010 = FA

Bit 8: Block floor 0; e
Bit 9-23: Block floor 1 ... 15; e
Bit 24: Use second landing call release; z
Bit 25-26:Floor range; E
Bit 27: Use second car call release; Z
Bit 28: Block door A; a
Bit 29: Block door B; b
Bit 30: Block car calls; S
Bit 31: Block landing calls; s

Fig. 6.21: Function block floors

Floor range
0: floors 0-15 can be blocked
1: floors 16-31 can be blocked
2: floors 32-47 can be blocked
3: floors 48-63 can be blocked

Examples

Function Raw register

Block floor 0, door A, block car calls 500001FA
Block floors 0 and 1, door B, block landing calls A00003FA
Block floors 0 ... 7, doors A and B, block car and landing calls F000FFFA
Block floors 16 ... 23, doors A and B, block car and landing calls F200FFFA
Block floors 32 ... 39, doors A and B, block car and landing calls F400FFFA

154 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 LON module configuration
I/O functions

7 LON module configuration

It is sometimes necessary to reconfigure a LON module. Provided for this eventuality is an “emergency editor”
for editing individual LON modules under MAIN MENU/Config/LON Configuration/Show LON Modu-
les. To edit the bytes, it is first necessary to perform a release via parameter LON-EDIT ENABLE=YES.
For a detailed and transparent configuration of the LON modules, NEW LIFT recommends using the LON
Module Center. With this universal LON module program, extensive adjustment options are available for all
parameters of the modules. The current program is available on the NEW LIFT website [Link]
service/download/pc-software/.

Requirements
The LON module editor can be used with the following modules:
››ADM xx
››EAZ xx
››SPK (speech computer I/F)

NOTE

Only modules that are in the FST LON module list can be edited. This list is created each time SEARCH LON
MODULES is called from the LON CONFIGURATION menu.
Please note that all ADMs in the LON module list appear as ADR.
Expert knowledge is necessary for using the editor since no help functionality is provided and each of the indivi-
dual bytes of the LON module configuration has a different function. The backup function of the FST-2XT/s does
not support the changes to the bytes; in addition, bytes changes are accepted immediately without prior notice.
Please always contact NEW LIFT if you do not know exactly which change is necessary for your needs.

Procedure
››Enable Edit mode with LON-EDIT ENABLE=YES.
This value is not stored and is always reset to NO following an FST restart!
››Byte-wise navigation through the configuration data.
For modules that do not appear in the list mentioned above, the changed value is not stored (see „7 LON
module configuration“ page 155).
››Save value with E.

NOTE

Before editing, please write down the old values so that they can be restored in case of doubt.
Some of the changed configuration values do not take effect until after a cold start of the LON module. This
applies, in particular, to the configuration of RIO-2 or SPK modules to another FST-ID number (e.g. FST-A /
FST-B). Please note that, in this case, the LON module with the new FST-ID will no longer be visible in the LON
module list.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 155

LON module configuration
I/O functions

ADR50XXX

ADR50XXX Byte:01

ADR50XXX Byte:06

ADR50XXX Byte:06 indicates the selected byte >XX<

value will be saved

ADR50XXX Byte:06

Bytes 01...12

Bytes 13...24

Bytes 25...36
Bytes 37...41

Fig. 7.1 Overview: LON module editing (example ADR-50XXX)

Set values
The following lists show important set values in HEX format and their locations in the menu table. Bytes 13 to 24
are available beginning with version ADM-50. Currently, 24 of the 41 bytes are used. Please contact NEW LIFT
if you require detailed information.
Byte addressesPrg: ADR50XXX EDITOR
[byte-01] [byte-02] [byte-03] [byte-04]
[byte-05] [byte-06] [byte-07] [byte-08]
[byte-09] [byte-10] [byte-11] [byte-12] bytes 01-24 for ADM-50
[byte-13] [byte-14] [byte-15] [byte-16]
[byte-17] [byte-18] [byte-19] [byte-20]
[byte-21] [byte-22] [byte-23] [byte-24]
[byte-25] [byte-26] [byte-27] [byte-28]
[byte-29] [byte-30] [byte-31] [byte-32]
[byte-33] [byte-34] [byte-35] [byte-36] bytes 25-41 currently have no function
[byte-37] [byte-38] [byte-39] [byte-40]
[byte-41]

156 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 LON module configuration
I/O functions

Set values ADR20, ADR20B, ADR20E

Byte Uses Set values Comment

01 Floor 00-3F (0-63 decimal)
02 Door A=0, B=1, C=2 ADM must be restarted
03 Bus no. 0-7 ADM must be restarted
04 FST-Host ID 0RRR0LLL ADM must be restarted
RRR="Right" FST, A=0, B=1 etc.
LLL="Left" FST A=0, B=1 etc.
05 Special FST selection for ADM-20E
A=0, B=1 etc.
06 Config. bits Bit 0=configured ››Must be set!
Bit 1=selectivity 1=ADM only for left FST ››Normally '0'
Bit 2=arrow mode lock 0=FST menu 1=
"Arrow"
Bit 3=arrow 0=direction 1=continue
Bit 4,5=reserved
Bit 6=occupied display option
Bit 7=disabled option
07 Input pin 12 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote off 1.
Bit 4=AutoRepeat Mode
Bit 5-7 reserved
08 Input pin 13 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote off 1.
Bit 4=AutoRepeat Mode
Bit 5-7 reserved
09 Output pin Bit 0-3=output function no. pin-14
7,14 Bit 4-7=output function no. pin-7
10 Add. info Input-function-dependent information
11 Add. info Input-function-dependent information
12 Not used

Pins 12 and 13 input function Value (hex) AutoRepeat Comment

Fire mode 2 Yes
Landing priority 3 No (standard)
Remote shutdown 4 Yes
Fire-recall selective 5 Yes
Remote shutdown selective 6 Yes Pin 12 function:
byte 07 bit 5=FST select.
0=left FST; 1=right FST
Pin 13 function:
byte 08 bit 5=
0=left FST; 1=right FST
Smoke detector 7 Yes
Landing priority selective 9 No (standard) Byte 11 = FST mask, HGFEDCBA
Special function A No Byte 11 = function number
Fire recall reset (SIA) B No
Landing priority super C No (standard)
Landing priority super selective D No (standard) Byte 11 = FST mask, HGFEDCBA

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 157

LON module configuration
I/O functions

Set values ADR21, ADR22 (penthouse), ADR23 (bank)

Byte Uses Set values Comment

01 Floor 00-3F (0-63 decimal)
02 Door A=0, B=1, C=2 ADM must be restarted
03 Bus no. 0-7 ADM must be restarted
04 FST-Host ID 00000LLL LLL="Left" FST A=0, B=1 etc. ADM must be restarted
05 Reserved
06 Config. bits Bit 0=configured ››Must be set!
Bit 1=selectivity 1=ADM only for left FST Bit ››Normally '0'
2=arrow mode lock 0=FST-menu 1= "Arrow"
Bit 3=arrow 0=direction 1=continue
Bit 4,5=EAZ Mode 0=hex 1=gray 2=1-of-N Bit
6=occupied display option
Bit 7=disabled option
07 Input pin 12 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote
Bit 4=AutoRepeat mode off 1.
Bit 5-7 reserved
08 Input pin 13 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote
Bit 4=AutoRepeat mode off 1.
Bit 5-7 reserved
09 Output pin 7,14 Bit 0-3=output function no. pin 14
Bit 4-7=output function no. pin 7
10 Add. info Input-function-dependent information (pin 12)
11 Add. info Input-function-dependent information (pin 13)
12 Not used

Pins 12 and 13 input function Value (hex) AutoRepeat Comment

Fire mode 2 Yes
Landing priority 3 No (standard)
Remote shutdown 4 Yes
Fire-recall selective 5 Yes
Remote shutdown selective 6 Yes
Smoke detector 7 Yes
Landing priority selective 9 No (standard) Byte 11 = FST mask, HGFEDCBA
Special function A No Byte 11 = function number
Fire recall reset (SIA) B No
Landing priority super C No (standard)

Set values ADR30 / 31 (EAZ-256.40/64)

Byte Uses Set values Comment

01 Floor 00-3F (0-63 decimal)
02 Door A=0, B=1, C=2 ADM must be cold started
afterwards
03 Bus no. 0-7 ADM must be cold started
afterwards
04 FST-Host ID 00000LLL LLL="Left" FST A=0, B=1 etc. ADM must be restarted
05 Reserved
06 Config. bits Bit 0=configured ››Must be set!
Bit 1=selectivity 1=ADM only for left FST ››Normally '0'
Bit 2=arrow mode lock 0=FST menu 1=
"arrow"
Bit 3=arrow 0=direction 1=continue
Bit 4,5=reserved
Bit 6=reserved
Bit 7=reserved
07 Input pin 8 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote
Bit 4=AutoRepeat mode bit 5-7 reserved off 1.

158 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 LON module configuration
I/O functions

Byte Uses Set values Comment

08 Input pin 9 Bit 0-3=input function no. Bit 4=AutoRepeat In event of fire recall, set remote
mode Bit 5-7 reserved off 1.
09 Reserved
10 Add. info Input-function-dependent information (pin 8)
11 Reserved
12 Not used

Pins 8 and 9 input function Value (hex) AutoRepeat Comment

Fire mode 2 Yes
Landing priority 3 No (standard)
Remote shutdown 4 Yes
Fire-recall selective 5 Yes
Remote shutdown selective 6 Yes
Smoke detector 7 Yes
Landing priority selective 9 No (standard) Please enquire with NEW LIFT
Special function A No Please enquire with NEW LIFT
Fire recall reset (SIA) B No
Landing priority super C No (standard) Please enquire with NEW LIFT

Set values ADR32 / 33 (EAZ-256.40/64)

Byte Uses Set values Comment

01 Floor 00-3F (0-63 decimal)
02 Door A=0, B=1, C=2 ADM must be cold started
afterwards
03 Bus no. 0-7 ADM must be cold started
afterwards
04 FST-Host ID 00000LLL LLL="Left" FST A=0, B=1 etc. ADM must be restarted
05 Reserved
06 Config. bits Bit 0=configured ››Must be set!
Bit 1=selectivity 1=ADM only for left FST ››Normally '0'
Bit 2=arrow mode lock 0=FST menu 1=
"arrow"
Bit 3=arrow 0=direction 1=continue
Bit 4,5=reserved
Bit 6=reserved
Bit 7=reserved
07 Input pin 8 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote
Bit 4=AutoRepeat mode bit 5-7 reserved off 1.
08 Input pin 9 Bit 0-3=input function no. Bit 4=AutoRepeat In event of fire recall, set remote
mode Bit 5-7 reserved off 1.
09 Reserved
10 Add. info Input-function-dependent information (pin 8)
11 Reserved
12 Not used

Pins 8 and 9 input function Value (hex) AutoRepeat Comment

Fire mode 2 Yes
Landing priority 3 No (standard)
Remote shutdown 4 Yes
Fire-recall selective 5 Yes
Remote shutdown selective 6 Yes
Smoke detector 7 Yes
Landing priority selective 9 No (standard) Please enquire with NEW LIFT
Special function A No Please enquire with NEW LIFT
Fire recall reset (SIA) B No

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 159

LON module configuration
I/O functions

Pins 8 and 9 input function Value (hex) AutoRepeat Comment

Landing priority super C No (standard) Please enquire with NEW LIFT

RIO-2 settings

Byte RIO-2 as I/O module RIO-2 as ASV module (pawl-control module)

3 08 00
4 10 10
5 01 01

Set values SPK (Prg=SPK000xx)

Byte Uses Set values Comment

1 FST-Host ID FST A=0, B=1 etc. ADM must be restarted

ADR-50 settings (includes the functions of the ADR20,20E,21,22, and 23)

Byte Uses Set values Comment

01 Floor 00-3F (0-63 decimal)
02 Door A=0, B=1, C=2 ADM must be restarted
03 Bus no. 0-7 ADM must be restarted
04 FST-Host ID FST A...H = 00...07 ADM must be restarted
04 FST-Host ID "Right, double" FST A...H = 0X...7X ADM must be restarted
X = variable if the "left" FST host changes in
"double" mode: A...H = X0...X7
05 Reserved
06 Config. bits Bit 0=configured ››Must be set!
Bit 1=selectivity 1=ADM only for left FST Bit ››Normally '0'
2=arrow mode lock 0=FST-menu 1= "Arrow"
Bit 3=arrow 0=direction 1=continue
Bit 4,5=EAZ Mode 0=hex 1=gray 2=1-of-N
Bit 6=occupied display option
Bit 7=disabled option
07 Input pin 12 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote
Bit 4=AutoRepeat mode off 1.
Bit 5-7 reserved
08 Input pin 13 Bit 0-3=input function no. In event of fire recall, set remote
Bit 4=AutoRepeat mode off 1.
Bit 5-7 reserved
09 Output pin 7,14 Bit 0-3=output function no. pin 14
Bit 4-7=output function no. pin 7
10 Add. info Input-function-dependent information (pin 12)
11 Add. info Input-function-dependent information (pin 13)
12 Add. info For other configurations, see LON Module Center

Pins 12 and 13 input function Value (hex) AutoRepeat Comment

Fire mode 2 Yes
Landing priority 3 No (standard)
Remote shutdown 4 Yes
Fire-recall selective 5 Yes
Remote shutdown selective 6 Yes
Smoke detector 7 Yes
Landing priority selective 9 No (standard) Byte 11 = FST mask, HGFEDCBA
Special function A No Byte 11 = function number
Fire recall reset (SIA) B No
Landing priority super C No (standard)

160 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Error list
Error messages

8 Error list
The FST controller stores up to 100 event and error messages. These messages can be called up on the user
interface of the FST (3 x E), with the PC-Card or via remote data transmission at any time.

LCD-Display

ERROR[00037/00040] A
28.09 [Link] [012] B
Door close failed C
FLOOR:03 V00 R01 I00
D

A Event/error no. 37 of 40 total

B Date / Time / Message Code
C Text description of event/error
D 03: Floor
V00: Generated signals (see "Position messages pos.: Virt=0b Real=00" on page 31)
R01: Actual signals (see "Position messages pos.: Virt=0b Real=00" on page 31)
I00= Information byte infobyte1 (page down to infobytes 2 ... 8 with ¢)

8.1 Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

0 NO ERROR
1 NMI Major CPU error determined by There may be
watchdog supervision. a hardware error. In
this case, the circuit board
must be replaced.
3 EMERGENCY STOP-ON "ON" and "OFF" states of the Check the
EMERGENCY STOP-OFF triggered emergency device are safety circuit inputs.
displayed.
Interruption of the safety circuit
before terminal FST X14.7. All
safety circuit inputs
are de-energized.
4 RESTART Restart of the FST application Message occurs after resetting
with the four-button combination,
Editor Data File Upload
5 DRIVE-BOOT Error during start up of drive Internal error
process.
6 DRIVE–WATCHDOG Major CPU error in drive process Internal error
area determined by watchdog
supervision.
7 DRIVE–XFER Error during transmission of data Internal error
relevant for drive process.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 161

Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

9 OPEN DOOR LOCK Door contact open while the car is The safety circuit of the door
moving. circuit was interrupted while the
Infobyte2: car was moving. Whether the
Safety circuit status: interruption was caused by a car
Bit 0 .. 2: not assigned door or shaft door is encoded in
Bit 3: emergency stop Infobyte2.
Bit 4: door contact C
Bit 5: door contact B
Bit 6: door contact A
Bit 7: blocking agent
("0" = interrupted, "1" = closed)
10 MISSED TARGET Upon arrival at the target floor, the
››Drive is not working accurately or
programmed level position was is load dependent.
exceeded or not reached ››Increase crawl distance (see
"Global -" on page 114).
››Carry out another calibration
drive.
››Check switch-off points prior to
levelling (see "Floor -" on page
114).
11 DOOR OPEN FAILED Car door does not open. ››Check door drive.
››Infobyte2: ››Check wiring of the safety circuit.
0 = door A ››Check operation of door relays
1 = door B on FSM.
2 = door C ››Check operation of door end
››Infobyte 3: switches and jumpers FSM-2
1 = door still closed J21, J31, J71, J81.
2 = door partially open ››State of the safety circuit at the
time of the error message is
encoded in Infobyte 2.
12 DOOR CLOSE FAILED Car door does not close. ››The car door is mechanically or
››Infobyte2: electrically blocked.
0 = door A ››Check operation of door relays
1 = door B on FSM.
2 = door C ››Check operation of door end
››Infobyte 3: switches and jumpers FSM-2
»1» = completely open, OPEN end J21, J31, J71, J81.
switch is active
»2» = does not close completely,
CLOSE end switch does not
activate
13 DOOR LOCK RETRY CNT Error during closing of doors. The shaft door contact (lock) does
››Infobyte2: not close even after n attempts.
0 = door A
1 = door B
2 = door C

The number of failed lock attempts

is displayed under MAIN MENU /
Doors / Doors-Basic / Lock fail.
14 DRM–START PROBLEM The car does not start moving ››Check pre-selection relay on
even with pre-selection active. FST
››Check control contactors of main
brake and valve
››Check motor, brake and valves
››Speed of car much too low
during start
Reset error with TEST MENU/
Fault Reset.

162 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

15 DRM–DRIVE MONITOR Monitoring or drive error. ››The encoder position does not
No movement of the car could be change even with pre-selection
determined during the drive. active.
Reset TEST MENU / Fault Reset. ››The drive does not move.
››No electric connection to
encoder.
››The encoder is faulty.
16 DRM–ENCODER FAILURE Plausibility testing of car position ››The encoder is faulty.
with the encoder is faulty. ››Check electric connection of the
Reset error with TEST MENU/ encoder.
Fault Reset. ››During commissioning: check
direction of rotation of the
encoder and execute Set floor 0.
››Encoder value is outside of the
shaft range.
››Encoder unplugged or plugged in
while controller switched on
17 DRM–CAR COMMS FAIL Communication between the FST- ››Plug-in connections of the trailing
Controller and the FSM-2 car top ribbon cable are not plugged or
control module is faulty. are loose.
››Line break in trailing ribbon
cable.
››Car top control module FSM-2
defective.
››Check jumper settings JK1,
JK2, JK3 on the car top control
module.
››Temporary short circuit on the
car bus, cable, FPM, EAZ, etc.;
see car bus topology
18 DRM–END FLOOR SPEED Reset TEST MENU / Fault The delay control circuit at the
Reset. top and bottom end floors has
triggered.
19 DRM–MISSING ZONE No zone message available. ››The car has reached a level
Reset TEST MENU / Fault position but does not receive a
Reset. zone message from the safety
device.
››Check safety device and zone
magnet switches.
20 DRM–BRAKE FAILURE The brakes do not react or cannot ››The brake does not release even
be released. with pre-selection active.
Reset TEST MENU / Fault ››The brake does not close even
Reset. with the car stopped.
Monitoring via input FST X1.19,
X1.20 (see „5.4 MAIN MENU
- Drive“ page 88) - Brake
Monitoring.
21 DRM–MOTOR FAILURE Temperature monitoring of the Motor overheated.
drive has triggered. Monitoring via input FST X1.22
(see „5.4 MAIN MENU - Drive“
page 88) - Drive Page.
22 DRM–FORCED STOP Input signal "Forced Stop" was Refer to the order-specific wiring
active at a programmable input. diagrams to determine which
The car is brought to a standstill signal triggered the forced stop
with open door on the floor. (see chapter (see „6.3 Program-
mable I/O ports“ page 139).
23 DRM–[Link] SW Overtravel of the bottom floor (rope The lower or upper emergency
lifts) or highest floor (hydraulic lifts) end switch has triggered. The
according to EN81. contact is queried by terminal FST
Reset TEST MENU / Fault X14.6 ("TC"). Or alternatively via
Reset. I/O port 000000DA.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 163

Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

24 DRM–DOOR FAILURE- The car door cannot be moved. In spite of active door control,
Reset TEST MENU / Fault the car door does not move; the
Reset. control stops the lift.
See DRM-Door menu item.
25 DRM CONTACTOR MONIT. Contactor monitoring has Terminal FST X1.23 must be
triggered. supplied with 24V while at a stand-
still. Check circuit according to
wiring diagram. Possibly increase
contactor monitoring time param-
eter
(see „5.4 MAIN MENU - Drive“
page 88) - Contactor
Monitoring.

26 DRM-SPECIAL I/O-PORT The special function monitored by One of the terminals X1.4 ... X1.11
a programmed input "Special I/O- is occupied with function "Special
Port" has failed. I/O port" (see wiring diagram).
Check the switching sequence
of this input. This is generally the
contact of the speed-limiter anti-
creep device or auxiliary brake.
27 SLIP OUTSIDE LEVEL Unexpected car movement out of Car moves outside of the level
the stopping position. range due to heavy loading or
unloading.
The Positioning/Floor/
Level UP/DOWN level edges
are set too small due to Ve that is
calibrated too small.
28 SLIP OUTSIDE ZONE Unexpected car movement out of Car moves outside of the zone
the zone. range.
29 DRIVE: CHKSUM-ERROR Error during transmission of drive Internal error
data from/to drive processor
30 BUS-I/F TIMEOUT Fault in LON-bus interface. Internal error
31 START–ABORT Drive start sequence cancelled. The drive cannot be started. No
return signals from drive or signals
delayed:
››See FST X1.19, X1.20 brake
monitoring.
››See FST X1.11 wiring diagram
››(see „5.4 MAIN MENU - Drive“
page 88) - Brake Delay.
32 STOP-ABORT Drive stop sequence cancelled. The drive cannot be stopped. No
return signals from drive or signals
delayed:
››See FST X1.19, X1.20 brake
monitoring.
››(see „5.4 MAIN MENU - Drive“
page 88) - Brake Delay.
33 RELEVELLING ABORT An error has occurred during relev- ››Check drive and pre-selection.
elling and the re-levelling process ››Check safety circuit bypass
was cancelled. control.
››Check bypass relay FST K20.
››(see „5.9 MAIN MENU - Doors“
page 130) - Bypass t-Off.
34 BYPASS FAILURE Safety circuit bypass not available ››Check FST K20.
despite zone message. ››Check wiring of the safety circuit.
››Check the safety circuit bypass
control.
››(see „5.9 MAIN MENU - Doors“
page 130)

164 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

35 DOOR LOCK TIMEOUT The set door lock timeout is not The car door is closed but the
long enough. lock contact has not closed in the
specified time.
››Perform mechanical check of
shaft doors (smooth running).
››Check door lock contacts.
››Increase door lock timeout (see
"Door lock timeout" in
chapter (see „5.9 MAIN MENU -
Doors“ page 130)
36 CAR LIGHT FAILURE Sensor on FSM-2 reports defective Check car lighting.
car lighting. Check sensor on FSM-2 (jumper
J112).
37 REGULATOR ERROR- Error message from frequency Check error list of the frequency
inverter when using serially inverter. The number of the regu-
controlled inverters. lator error corresponds to the error
code in the documentation of the
frequency inverter.
38 REFILL PUMP TIMEOUT Error during refilling of the The cut-off pressure for refilling
hydraulic counterweight. was not reached after 30 sec.
Check function and control of the
refill valve.
39 SAFETY CURTAIN BRK. The safety curtain was interrupted Check function and control of the
while the car was moving. safety curtain (see "Light curtain"
in chapter (see „5.9 MAIN MENU -
Doors“ page 130).
40 SAFETY CURTAIN FAIL Error during test of safety curtain. The FST controller outputs a test
signal to the FSM-2 X7 or X9 for
the safety curtain prior to each
drive. The safety curtain acknowl-
edges the test signal with an inter-
ruption of the safety circuit.
››Check operation of the safety
curtain test.
››Check the length of the test
pulse under MAIN MENU -
Doors - Doors-Basic - SAFETY
CURTAIN FAIL (see „5.9 MAIN
MENU - Doors“ page 130) -
SAFETY CURTAIN FAIL
41 DRIVE-SERIAL OFF No serial connection to the ››Check connection cable between
frequency inverter (FST X11, DCP) FST X11 and frequency inverter.
››Check settings in frequency
inverter (DCP03).
42 DRIVE-SERIAL BAD Serial connection to the frequency › › Check connection cable between
inverter is faulty (FST X11, DCP) FST X11 and frequency inverter.
››Check shielding of connection
cable.
43 UPS FAILURE-OFF State change at programmable Check function of the UPS.
UPS FAILURE-ON input "UPS FAILURE" for moni-
toring a UPS error message
44 APRON CONTACT FAIL The apron cannot be folded in. Check mechanics, contact or I/O
port with setting 000014F2.
45 [Link] TEST FAIL The emergency stop test for
inclined lifts has failed.
46 UNEXPECTED STOP Error in DCP communication Error in frequency inverter, DCP
between FST and frequency cable or FST.
inverter. Or EMC problems caused by
faulty motor brake resistor or DCP
cable shielding and connection.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 165

Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

47 ASV ERROR- Error in controlling the Check signal interface of the pawl-
pawl-control. control (see system description of
the pawl-control).
48 MOTOR-ROOM OVERHEAT The thermostat in the motor room Monitoring via terminal FST X1.16.
has triggered (temperature > 40
°C).
49 REVISION TOO FAST Inspection speed or auxiliary Check drive speeds and shaft
speed over 800 mm/s. positioning.
50 FAST-START DOOR SW. The quick start door "almost Check door switch
closed" switch closed too early.
51 DRM-ZONE BRIDGED No movement was detected in the Door zone switches A and B are
door zone switch during the last permanently connected to 24 V.
drive.
52 SAFETY CCT BRIDGED During the last arrival and door Check door lock/door switch
opening, the safety circuit did not safety circuit.
open.
53 DRM-CMM FAILURE "Critical Module Monitoring" does The list number of the missing
not receive feedback from one of module is in the info byte.
the modules. This can be displayed in
Show-LON-Modules.
54 DRM-BELT SLIPPAGE Toothed belt monitoring has ››Check tension of toothed belt.
triggered. The toothed belt has ››Check toothed belt and wheel for
slipped more than 100 mm. dirt deposits.
55 WRONG ENCODER DIR. During a learn or calibration drive: ››Change / Positioning /
encoder position moves against Global / Direction to other
the controlled direction. direction.
››Check connections from the
drive.
56 DRM-AUXILIARY BRAKE Error at auxiliary brake monitoring ››Check monitoring contacts
contact. ››Extend / Drive / Aux.
Brake Max Time.
57 [Link] The maximum allowed relevel- Check drive.
ling time of 60 sec. has been
exceeded.
58 ROPE-TENSION-ERROR Input port signal contact has Input port is only used for
triggered. signalling.
59 LCS DATA MISSING FST does not receive load meas- Check LCS and, if applicable,
urement from LCS. jumper on LCS.
60 DRM LITHIUM BATTERY Voltage of lithium button cells Check the FST onboard lithium
dropped below < 2.58V. button cell for secure seating;
This message, which can be indi- otherwise replace.
vidually set by the user, must be See also event message 141
enabled with MISCEL- BATTERY EMPTY.
9=01000000. This message results Both messages are caused by
in the installation being shut down! insufficient lithium battery voltage.
61 DRM PROGRAMMABLE 1 Freely programmable Check the signal on an
error message under I/O port or the set func-
System/Factory Menu/ tion under Config/I/O
DRM-Program1:Texts Configuration/I/O Ports
Triggered via an I/O port with value XXXX39F2
X= custom value
62 DRM-PROGRAMMABLE 2 Freely programmable Check the signal on an
error message under I/O port or the set func-
System/Factory Menu/ tion under Config/I/O
DRM-Program2:Texts Configuration/I/O Ports
Triggered via an I/O port with value XXX139F2
X= custom value

166 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

63 DRM-PROGRAMMABLE 3 Freely programmable error Check the signal on an
message under System/ I/O port or the set func-
Factory Menu/DRM- tion under Config/I/O
Program3:Texts triggered via Configuration/I/O Ports
an I/O port with value XXX239F2
X= custom value
64 DRM-DRIVE ERROR The monitoring contact of the drive Check regulator. If no fault alarm
(X1.21 NC) has switched on. By contact is connected, monitoring
default, the regulator fault alarm must be switched off under
contact (inverter or similar) is Drive/Antriebueberwa-
connected here. chug. = NO
65 PRE-SELECTION RELAY Current measurement of the coils Check relay K0-K12 or the used
ERROR of the K0-K12 pre-selection relay relay (depending on drive types)
faulty. for secure seating; otherwise
replace because coil is defective
66 DRM UCM-A3 ERROR Detection of an uncontrolled car With an open door, car has
movement with open door! This ››exceeded the UCM-A3 zone,
message appears depending on UCM-A3 zone = zone range of
the door position and car speed magnet switch S27/28
and position. ››or, within the UCM-A3 zone,
Possible serious error in the drive, exceeded the speed of 0.2m/s
hydraulic unit, regulation and/or for 102ms from standstill,
control area! ››or the drive-brake or valve
See also the "UCM-A3" manual. system is to be checked for
errors.
67 DRM A3-DRIVE ERROR The feedback from the monitoring Signal sequence at terminals FST
contacts of the actuator (e.g., X1:19 and X1:20 is incorrect.
holding brake or valve) is faulty. Actuator or feedback contacts are
Error can only be reset with TEST faulty.
MENU/UCM-A3 [Link]!
See also the "UCM-A3" manual.
68 DRM ANTI-CREEP The response (check during Check signal sequence on the
DEVICE start and stop of the drive) from ports.
the anti-creep device on I/O port Clamping fixture or feedback
00003FF2 "Terminal open" is contacts are faulty. Fault alarm
exceeded after 3 seconds of contact of anti-creep device
activation or 000040F2 "error tripped.
message at clamping fixture".
Error results in opening of the door
and blocking of the lift.
69 DRM [Link] SWITCH Optional monitoring of the mechan- Check signal sequence on the
ical inspection end switches ports.
through I/O port 000142F2 for TC Switching cam or feedback
or 000042F2 BC floor tripped. contacts are faulty or do not switch
in the defined range.
Defined range TC = from middle
of next-to-last to last floor. BC =
analogous to TC.
70 DRM Re-levelling 10 re-levellings must be performed Check the holding brakes because
monitoring in the maximum allowed time, the holding force is too low.
otherwise the car is brought to
a standstil on the highest floor
with the error message DRM
Re-levelling monitoring
71 DRM Anti Creep
72 Bypass Failure
73 DRM Headroom
74 DRM Safety Gear (Dn) Safety gear, whose evaluation runs Safety gear has activated
DRM Safety Gear (Up) via an I/O port, has triggered.
DRM Safety Gear (-) The ridden direction is displayed
when the error occurred

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 167

Error list
Error messages

Code Message Description Reason

75 DRM-Speed Governor Speed limiter, whose evaluation Speed limiter has activated
runs via an I/O port, has triggered.
76 DRM-Photocell ERR The level change at the photocell - Testing of the wiring in regard to
input of the FSM-2 did not take wire breakage
place after voltage has been swit- - Check the shutdown of the light
ched off. curtain
This leads to a malfunction of the - Set the light curtain
photocell. - Replace the light curtain
By reducing kinetic closing force
of the car door and the acou-
stic sounding of a signal the
further operation of the system is
possible.
The info byte indicates the door
side:
1=A; 2=B; 4=C Bits are combinable
77 DRM-Door Bridged It was detected that a door circuit Check the blocking agent circuit
is bridged. or the car doors circuit for possible
This may be the blocking agent bridging.
circuit, the car doors circuit or the Check the end switch DOOR
end switch DOOR CLOSE of the CLOSE.
door drive.
The info byte indicates the door
side:
0=A; 1=B; 2=C
78 Glass Door Stopped During the door opening the rever- - There are some objects in the
sing contact of the door controller landing or car doors.
has triggered. - Sluggishly closing door, mecha-
The info byte indicates the door nical adjustment required.
side: - Check the electrical connection
0=A; 1=B; 2=C of the reversing contact.
- Check the parameter of the door
controller

168 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Error list
Event messages

8.2 Event messages

Code Message Description Reason
128 COLDSTART Restart of FST-Controller ››FST-2-Controller was switched
off and on again on the fuse or
the main switch.
››Power failure
››All four arrow buttons were
pressed simultaneously.
››Menu item FST-Reset was
performed.
129 INSPECTION-ON Inspection work is being carried The inspection switch on the car
INSPECTION-OFF out. roof is set to INSPECTION or no
safety circuit interruption follows.
131 POWER LOST Failure of the 24 V power supply. System was switched off or power
supply defective.
132 REMOTE RESET The FST controller was reset by The FST controller was reset
the GST Group Controller. through the serial interface.
133 CALIBRATION–START Calibration progress is displayed. A calibration drive was triggered.
CALIBRATION–OK!
CALIBRATION-ABORT!
134 LEARN DRIVE-START Learn drive progress is displayed. A learn drive was triggered.
LEARN DRIVE--OK!
LEARN DRIVE-ABORT!
135 SOFTWARE UPDATE FST software update was Action by user
performed via USB stick.
136 EVACUATION-ON An evacuation drive was carried Evacuation signal on a program-
EVACUATION-OFF out. mable I/O port was active.
EVACUATION-OK
137 DRIVE-SERIAL OK DCP-interface X12 in operation. The serial DCP-interface X11
between FST and frequency
inverter was initialised without
error (e.g. after being switched
on).
138 MONITOR SIGNAL-ON State change at programmable The programmable input "Monitor"
MONITOR SIGNAL-OFF input "Monitor" has changed its state. This input
can be used to enter the status
change of an arbitrary signal in the
error list (see „6.3 Programmable
I/O ports“ page 139).
139 APRON OUT-ON State change at input "Apron For very small shaft pits, the state
APRON OUT-OFF monitoring". of the electrically monitored apron
is registered as a message in the
error list.
140 ORIENTATION Orientation drive during incre- ››Power failure for non-level car
mental positioning. ››Serious inconsistency in magnet
switch states TC, BC and Zone
B.
141 BATTERY EMPTY Voltage of lithium button cells Check the FST onboard lithium
dropped below < 2.58V. button cell for secure seating;
otherwise replace.
142 AUXILIARY-ON Auxiliary mode control was The auxiliary mode switch in the
AUXILIARY-OFF switched on and off. control cabinet was actuated.
143 FIREMAN MODE-ON Fire recall was switched on or off. ››Fire recall received at FST, RIO
FIREMAN MODE-OFF or ADM.
››FIREMAN MODE-OFF is always
displayed if fire-recall I/O ports
are used (normally closed
contacts).

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 169

Error list
Event messages

Code Message Description Reason

144 ENCODER RE-ALIGNED Toothed belt monitoring for abso-
If the read position of an upward
lute positioning: drive from the bottom floor is
different from the reference posi-
Automatic correction has occurred
Positioning/Global/Enc. tion of the zone signal.
Belt Mon. = ON The shaft table was shifted
accordingly.
145 LCS-DRIFT-ADJUSTMENT Load measuring system LCS auto- A constant additional load in
matically performed an empty load excess of 30 kg has been present
calibration. in the car for more than 2 hours.
Config/Weight Sensor/LCS
Settings/Auto-Adjust-
ments/Drift Compensation
= YES
146 BLDG. AUTOM. STATUS I/O-Port "GLT-signals" can be Change of the signal status from
used to display changes for inactive to active.
external signals in the event list of
the FST.
I/O-Port=000n34F2
n=0...9, A...F
Placeholder n is registered in
infobyte 1 of the event list.
147 ARREST TEST ACTIVATED Message appears from the time of Action triggered by the user
activation of the remote triggering under TEST MENU/FangTest-
of the speed limiter Automatik or Immediate
arrest test.
148 A3 ACTUATOR TEST OK! The ten test drives for the func- Action triggered by user under
tion check of the self-monitoring TEST MENU/UCM-A3 Test
with A3 actuators (e.g., holding Aktor
brake or valves) were successfully
completed. See UCM-A3 manual
149 currently without
function
150 currently without
function
151 Bypass Switch On Bypass Swith in the controller Action by USER with triangle key.
Bypass Switch Off cabinet was switched in position
NORMAL, SP, FK or DT.

170 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Index
Event messages

9 Index

A
Abbreviations 6
ADM
Bus masks 95, 109
Anti-nuisance function 96
Attendant operation 25, 109, 122
Automatic test drive 91 see test drive 92, 133

B
Backup 124
Background music 101
Bank-control 104
Bit calculation 136
Blocking agent see Lock
Brake monitoring 86
Buffer test 133
Bus see LON bus
Bus cable 68
Bus plan 42
Buttons 13, 18

C
Calibration drive 25, 86
Cam delay 128
Car priority 26, 144
Car ventilator 96, 109
Car lighting 96
Car light see car lighting
Car-operate-panel 97
Car top control module 59
State 29
Chain compensation 99
Chime functions 95
Clock see time
CMM 6, 28, 92
Colour code
Bus cable 68
Travelling cable 69
Contactor monitoring 86, 162
Counter
Service 84
Crawl distance 114

D
Date 123
Debounce value 144
Departure arrow 107
Destination call 151
Diagnostic messages 27
Doors 128
Door times 126
Door test 106

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 171

Index
Event messages

Down-valve shutoff 87
DRM
DRM test 38, 133
Drive
Type 86
States 30
Drive optimisation 86, 89
Drift compensation 100

E
EAZ configuration 94, 95
Empty load 96, 99
Emergency stop 24, 50, 87
End switch 25-26, 60, 107, 130
End switch test 20, 141
Energy-saving mode 106
EN 81-20 80, 126
Error
Error list 15, 84, 158
Error message 159
ESM see energy-saving mode
Evacuation
Switch 14, 21
Function 23, 106, 148

I
I/O configuration 93
I/O ports 28, 93, 135, 144
Input function see I/O Ports
Installation mode 26, 90, 144

F
Factory number 95
Fire service standard 25, 98
Fireman options 98
Fire main floor 98
Fireman mode 99, 109, 144, 167
Filter setting 123
Flat travelling cables see travelling cables
Flag 135, 142
Floor
Level position 27, 114
Pseudo floor 103, 116
setting
blocking
Zone
Floor locking 151
LMS 92
bypassing 125
FPM see car operating panel module
FSM
FSM-2 see car top control module
Full load 100, 144
Function
Loading function 103, 110

G
Group settings 95
GST
172 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs
 Index
Event messages

menu 95

H
Hidden menus 70, 124
Homing time 87

I
Incremental positioning 29, 116-118
Information
Information page 13, 40
Info texts 37

J
Jumpers 60
FSM-2 61
FST-2 XT/s 48

L
Lag time 102, 144
Landing priority 26, 90
function 140
Landing call 25, 139
Language 123
LCD-display 24
LCS 98
Learn drive 90, 167
LEDs 41, 50, 61
FSM-2 59
Level adjustment 115, 117
Level position 22, 114, 116
Lift ID-Name 95
Lift ID-Nummer 95
Light curtain 130, 147
Lift-boy see attendant operation
Line A 24
Line B 25
Line C 27
Line D 36
Loading function 110
Loading program 110
Load control system 100
Lobby stop 103, 112
LON bus 68
LON configuration 92
LON-modules 102, 124, 128
Lock 83, 131

M
Main menu 83
Drive 86
Config 90
Positioning 114
Calls 121
Service 84
Blocking 83
System 123
Doors 128
Manual door 130

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 173

Index
Event messages

Messages 24, 25, 27, 36

Menu 15, 71
Hidden menus 71, 124
Misuse
Emergency call 96, 149
Modem 92
Motor run-on see stopping time

N
Nudge 129, 131
Nudging 39, 129, 147

O
Open hold time 130-132
Opening time 129-131
Output function 135 see I/O Ports
Overload 52, 88, 110

P
Panel test 126
Park drive 91, 107, 144
Park drive program 91, 107
Password setting 83
Password 123
Pawl-control 87, 88
States 35
Photocell 125, 126
Pin 34 function 110
Priority
Landing see landing priority
Car see car priority
Programming 135
Position indicator 141
dimming
configuration
Pseudo floor 141

Q
Quick start 88

R
Ramp drive 105
RAW register 136
Recorder 123
Recording 123
Recording filter 127
Re-levelling 86, 88
Relevelling see re-levelling
Remote entry 104
Remote shutdown 33, 102, 147
Resolution of absolute encoder 114
Reset 21, 24, 39, 99
Reversing time 131

S
Safety circuit messages 24

174 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Index
Event messages

Safety curtain 26, 99, 163

Safety circuit bypass control 51
Safety levels 106 SAM 101
Safety instructions 8
Shaft positioning 27, 49
Definition 49
Incremental 54, 49, 114-116
Parameters 118
Type 118
Sel. door-security 105, 112
Service counter 83
Security circuit
States 19
Sockets 52-58
FSM-2 62-67
FST-2XT/s 52-61
Special parameters 88
Special call 121
Speech output 101
Speech output codes 110
Special drive
function 148
Start method 87
Stopping time
Drive 86
State messages 25
Statistics 123
Status messages 27
Super priority 91

T
Terminal strips
FST-2XT/s 52
Terminal strips
FSM-2 62
Test
End switch 25
DRM 6, 26
Buffer 107, 133
Deceleration monitoring 133
Test drive 91, 133
Test menu 15, 133
Time 88
Travelling cable 69

U
Update 37, 123, 128

V
Valve time 87
Ventilator see car ventilator
VIP mode 113
Volume 101

W
Weight sensor 101 see load control system

Z
Zone 23, 51, 114

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 175

Certificates
Event messages

10 Certificates
Attached to the following pages you will find

››For FST 5 00 (FST-2XT) and FSM 5 20 (FSM-2)

»»Examination Certificate
»»Annex to Examination Certificate
»»Declaration of Conformity

››For FST 51 00 (FST-2XTs) and FSM 5 20 (FSM-2)

»»Examination Certificate
»»Annex to Examination Certificate
»»Declaration of Conformity

176 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 177

Certificates
Event messages

Enclosure to the EU-Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

Authorised Manufacturer of Serial Production – Production Sites (valid from: 2016-10-04):

Company: NEW LIFT GmbH

Address: Lochhammer Schlag 8

D-82166 Gräfelfing
Germany

- END OF DOCUMENT -

Based on: Document from NEW LIFT of 2016-08-30 Page 1 of 1

178 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

1 Scope of application
The test items are the FST 5 00 (FST-2XT) printed circuit board as "lift control system"
and FSM 5 20 (FSM-2) printed circuit board as "car top control module" with electronic
components, taps in the safety circuit and safety circuit bypass control (FST 5 00) as well
as subsystem as element for detecting unintended car movement. Also tested are the
clearance and creepage distances of the FST 5 00 and the FSM 5 20 as well as the safety
circuit scan control of the FST 5 00.
1.1 Function of the safety circuit
The safety circuit bypass control consists of the K21, K22 and K23 safety relays.
The SHS_ZOFR (+24V) zone release signal must be activated by the controller. A zone
release is active if necessary, i.e., if the controller is to open the car door on the corre-
sponding floor.
First, K21 must be energized; for this purpose, K20, K22 and K23 must be de-energized.
K21 holds itself as long as K20 is not energized and there is a zone release.
K23 can only be energized after K21 if zone switch B closes. K23 holds itself as long as
zone switch B is closed.
K22 can be energized after K23 and K21 if zone switch A closes. K22 holds itself as long
as zone switch A is closed.
If K23 and K22 are energized, K20 can also be energized as soon as the controller starts
the bypass release (0V). This, however, only occurs as needed and if the car speed is
<0.3m/s. Not until K20 energizes does K21 de-energize. The door bypass is now active
and remains so until the bypass release is cancelled and K20 is de-energized again.
K22 and K23 are not de-energized until switches A and B are opened again due to a drive
outside of the door zone. Only if both relays are de-energized can another cycle begin
by energizing K21 as soon as the controller switches a renewed zone release. Transistor
T2 is used for resetting relay K22 after a power failure.
In the event of failure of the operating voltage, zone switch A continues to be supplied via
auxiliary power supply HSG, allowing the door zone to be detected should freeing be nec-
essary. At the same time, T2 switches K22 and K23 off so that when the operating voltage
is restored, the switching sequences can be completed as described.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 179

Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

Figure 1: Portion of the wiring diagram for the control system of the door zone bypass

180 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

Depicted on the following page is the wiring diagram of the safety circuit scan control and
safety circuit bypass control (figure 2).

Figure 2: Wiring diagram of the safety circuit scan control and safety circuit bypass con-
trol Type FST-2XT
.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 181

Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

1.2 Description of the function against unintended car movement

For the device as a detecting and, if necessary, triggering element: if combined with a
braking element tested in accordance with A3, e.g., in the form
a) of a drive brake for electrically operated rope lifts,
b) of a safety valve or similar for hydraulically driven lifts, this can represent the detecting
as well as the triggering element of the entire protective device against the unintended
movement of the car. If, on the other hand, the device is combined with a braking ele-
ment tested in accordance with A3, e.g., in the form
c) of a double-acting safety gear/braking device triggered by a speed limiter tested in ac-
cordance with A3 as a triggering element for both electrically operated rope lifts as
well as with hydraulically driven lifts this can only represent the detecting element of
the entire protective device against the unintended movement of the car.
1.2.1 Electrically operated passenger and freight lifts
The safety circuit bypass control is only activated by the control system if firstly the target

The safety circuit bypass control, when triggered, i.e.,

if the door zone (defined by two magnet switches) is exited as well as

and/or open car door,

ensures a safe shutdown of the downstream drive components and, subsequently,

either the triggering of the braking element according to cases (a.) and (b.) in the
comment of the previous section
or the activation of the triggering element of the protective device against the unin-
tended car movement in cases of the combination specified in (c). of the previous
section.

The car speed is detected by the control system via the encoder of the shaft positioning
system. For additional safety (redundancy), a speed-dependent contact of the frequency
inverter is integrated at the terminals of the control system A1:X13.7 and A1:X13.14. It is
thereby ensured that the safety circuit bypass control is also inactive (safety circuit open)
if the frequency inverter detects a car speed of more than 0.2 m/s.
1.2.2 Hydraulically operated passenger and freight lifts
In principle, the function is identical to that of electrically operated passenger and freight
lifts (electrically operated rope lifts), but without monitoring of the car speed.

182 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

1.2.3 Electrically as well as hydraulically operated passenger and freight lifts

In order to adhere to the permissible total stopping distance in the case of an unintended
car movement, the length of the door zone must be limited depending on the installation
and its maximum length calculated during the course of planning the lift system.
For the device in question, the reaction times of the detecting element (sensors and their
control system) as well as the reaction times and reaction distances of the triggering ele-
ment and those of the braking element(s) in addition to the maximum possible accelera-
tion by the drive in the event of an error (if applicable) and the mass ratios and other fac-
tors that influence the movement of the lift system (compensation tools, rope lengths de-
pending on the type of rope arrangement and drive arrangement,...) are known for this
purpose.
The calculated, maximum door zone size must be entered in the menu of the control sys-
tem during commissioning. During the automatic learn drive, the actually specified door
zone lengths are automatically checked for correctness at all floors by the control system.
During tests of the lift system in the course of the conformity assessment procedure, tests
"UCM-A3 test upward" and "UCM-A3 test downward" are to be performed in the test menu
of the FST controller.
This ensures that the UCM case is performed with the assistance of the UCM test relay
under safe conditions, i.e., with closed car door and locked landing door.
Both UCM cases, the "exiting of the door zone" as well as "excessive speed" (only for
electrically operated lifts with rope drive) with open car door(s) and/or unlocked landing
door(s), are detected by the control system. The lift system is brought to a standstill with
the "LSU-UCM-A3 Error" error message and can only be put back into operation by reset-
ting the error message in the control system menu by a competent person.

In the case of a power failure, the "LSU-UCM-A3 Error" is stored and prevents the installa-
tion from being operated upon restoration of power.

Designation Detection time

FST-2XT safety circuit by- Electr./mech. switching 10 ms
pass control
Contactor for brake / Siemens 3RTxxx 12 ms
valves
Zone magnet switch Schmersal BN32r
Normally open (NO) con- 0.3 - 1.5 ms
tact switching time
Restarting precision + / - 0.25 mm
Speed signal > 0.2 ms FST-2XT 102 ms
Speed signal > 0.2 ms Frequency inverter 15 ms

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 183

Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

It is not mandatory that the specified types of "contactors for brake/valves" as well as
"zone magnet switches" be used. The type can be selected based on the reaction and de-
tection times of the "contactors for brake/valves" as well as the "zone magnet switches". If
types other than those specified above are used, verification of the reaction and detection
times is to be provided.
Shown on the following pages are the wiring diagram for rope-operated passenger and
freight lifts (figure 3), the wiring diagram for hydraulically operated lift systems with shutoff
valve as braking element (figure 4) as well as the wiring diagram for hydraulically operated
lift systems with redundant lowering valves as braking elements (figure 5).

Figure 3: Wiring diagram for rope-operated passenger and freight lifts

Figure 4: Wiring diagram for hydraulically operated lift systems with shutoff valve
as braking element

184 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

Figure 5: Wiring diagram for hydraulically operated lift systems with redundant
lowering valves as braking elements

2 Conditions
2.1 The safety devices of the circuit board (tap for safety chain) are to be connected as speci-
fied in document BMP-Hinweise_FST-2XT.
2.2 The safety circuit bypass control is integrated on the printed circuit board as a fixed com-
ponent of the FST-2XT 5 00 controller. It is designed for a temperature range from 0 to
+65°C at a relative humidity of 15 to 85%.
2.3 The operating voltage is 24V DC, whereas the operating contacts and conductor paths
are designed for a 230V AC (optional 48V DC, 110V AC) safety circuit, fuse-protected
with max. 4A.

2.4 A closing contact from X20.1 to X14.1 is integrated in the controller for quick-start.
Direct connection from X14.1 to X15.7 is not allowed.

2.5 The wiring must be implemented according to "FST-2XT safety circuit scan control and
safety circuit bypass control schematic drawing" figure 2 (e.g., N-wire at X15.6, return wire
of the contactors and valves at X20.2; X14.1 not connected to X15.7).
2.6 If the braking element is supplied with power directly via the electric safety circuit, redun-
dant activation of the braking element is not necessary. If the braking element requires a
voltage other than that available directly from the electric safety circuit, redundant activa-
tion with standstill monitoring is necessary.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 185

Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

2.7 If the braking element is not involved in the checking of the speed or deceleration in nor-
mal operation or does not stop the car in normal operation but is rather only responsible
for braking in the UCM case, it is not necessary to monitor the proper function of the brak-
ing element.
Otherwise, the proper opening or closing of the braking element via the contacts required
for this purpose is necessary via the control software.
2.8 Use only in combination with:
- Control systems manufactured by NEW LIFT, model FST-2XT
2.9 For electrically operated rope lifts, a signal must be made available to the control system
in the event of speeds in excess of 0.2 m/s.
2.10 The subcomponents described in this certification must be supplemented with another
subcomponent for the realisation of the "UCM-A3 function".
For this purpose, assembly operation must adhere to the requirements before performing
the conformity assessment procedure.
2.11 For hydraulically operated lift systems, items 3.6, 3.7, 3.7.1, 3.7.2 and 5 of the UCM-A3
manual are to be adhered to during commissioning or recurring inspections and mainte-
nance.
2.12 For electrically operated rope lift systems, items 4.6, 4.7, 4.7.1, 4.7.2 and 5 of the UCM-
A3 manual are to be adhered to during commissioning or recurring inspections and
maintenance.
2.13 The "UCM-A3" manual is to be included with the product.
2.14 The EU type examination certificate may only be used together with the corresponding
appendix and attachment (manufacturer list for serial production). This attachment is up-
dated according to information from the manufacturer / representative and published with
the updated information.

3 Notes
3.1 This EU type examination certificate was prepared on the basis of the following
harmonised standards:
- EN 81-1:1998 + A3:2009 (D), Appendix F.8
- EN 81-2:1998 + A3:2009 (D), Appendix F.8
- EN 81-20:2014 (D), Item [Link]
- EN 81-50:2014 (D), Item 5.6
In the event of changes or additions to the aforementioned standards or in the event of
further developments to the state of the art, the EU type examination certificate must be
revised.
3.2 The test results refer only to the "FST-2XT" and "FSM-2" printed circuit boards with elec-
tronic components with taps in the safety circuit and safety circuit bypass control as well
as subsystem against unintended car movement and the associated EU type examination.

186 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Annex to the EU Type Examination Certificate

No. EU-ESD 023 of 2016-10-04

3.3 At the "detection device for unintended car movement (UCM) door zone" a sign must be
present (e.g., near the control system) with details on the identification of the component
with the name of the manufacturer, EU type examination designation and type plate.
3.4 In the event of changes or deviations from the version documented here, an examination
and, if necessary, adaptation of the alternative measures is required by the notified body.
3.5 This certificate is based on the state of the art, which is documented by the currently valid
harmonised standards. If the event of changes or additions to these standards or in the
event of further advances in the state of the art, a revision may become necessary.

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 187

Certificates
Event messages

188 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 189

Certificates
Event messages

190 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 191

Certificates
Event messages

192 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 193

Certificates
Event messages

194 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 195

Certificates
Event messages

196 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 197

Certificates
Event messages

198 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

 Certificates
Event messages

Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs 199

Certificates
Event messages

200 Manual FST-2XT FST-2XTs

Notes
NEW LIFT Steuerungsbau GmbH

Lochhamer Schlag 8
82166 Graefelfing

Tel +49  89  –  898  66  –  0

Fax +49  89  –  898  66  –  300
Mail info@[Link]

Serviceline
Tel +49  89  –  898  66  –  110
Mail service@[Link]

[Link]